CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
S
TEPHEN LEONARD BUILDING REHABILITATION – PROJECT NO. CP230052
1. Parties and Date.
This Contract is made and entered into this ________________ day of ___________, 2024 by and between the City of Merced, a California Charter Municipal Corporation of the State of California (“City”) and Diede Construction, Inc., a Stock Corporation with its principal place of business at 12393 West 99 Frontage Road - P.O. Box 1007, Lodi CA 95258 (“Contractor”). City and Contractor are sometimes individually referred to as “Party” and collectively as “Parties” in this Contract.
2. Recitals.
2.1 City. City is a California Charter Municipal Corporation organized under the laws of the State of California, with power to contract for services necessary to achieve its purpose.
2.2 Contractor. Contractor desires to perform and assume responsibility for the provision of certain construction services required by the City on the terms and conditions set forth in this Contract. Contractor represents that it is duly licensed and experienced in providing services such as rehabilitation of Stephen Leonard Building. The following license classifications are required for this Project: Class B
2.3 Project. City desires to engage Contractor to render such services for the STEPHEN LEONARD BUILDING REHABILITATION – Project No. CP230052 as set forth in this Contract.
2.4 Project Documents & Certifications. Contractor has obtained, and delivers concurrently herewith, a performance bond, a payment bond, and all insurance documentation, as required by the Contract.
3. Terms
3.1 Incorporation of Documents. This Contract includes and hereby incorporates in full by reference the following documents, including all exhibits, drawings, specifications and documents therein, and attachments and addenda thereto:
• Services/Schedule (Exhibit “A”)
• Plans and Specifications (Exhibit “B”)
• Special Conditions (Exhibit “C”)
• Contractor’s Certificate Regarding Workers’ Compensation (Exhibit “D”) • Public Works Contractor Registration Certification (Exhibit “E”) • Payment and Performance Bonds (Exhibit “F”)
• Addenda
• Change Orders executed by the City
Attachment 2
• Latest Edition of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Green Book), Excluding Sections 1-9
• Notice Inviting Bids, if any
• Instructions to Bidders, if any
• Contractor’s Bid
• Schedule of Values
3.2 Contractor’s Basic Obligation; Scope of Work. Contractor promises and agrees, at its own cost and expense, to furnish to the City all labor, materials, tools, equipment, services, and incidental and customary work necessary to fully and adequately complete the Project, including all structures and facilities necessary for the Project or described in the Contract (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the “Work”), for a Total C ontract Price as specified pursuant to this Contract. All Work shall be subject to, and perfor med in accordance with the above referenced documents, as well as the exhibits attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference. The plans and specifications for the Work are further described in Exhibit “B” attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference. Special Conditions, if any, relating to the Work are described in Exhibit “C” attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference.
3.2.1 Change in Scope of Work. Any change in the scope of the Work, method of performance, nature of materials or price thereof, or any other matter materially affecting the performance or nature of the Work shall not be paid for or accepted unless such change, addition or deletion is approved in writing by a valid change order executed by the City. Should Contractor request a change order due to unforeseen circumstances affecting the performance of the Work, such request shall be made within five (5) business days of the date such circumstances are discovered or shall waive its right to request a ch ange order due to such circumstances. If the Parties cannot agree on any change in price require d by such change in the Work, the City may direct the Contractor to proceed with the performance of the change on a time and materials basis.
3.2.2 Substitutions/“Or Equal”. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 3400(b), the City may make a finding that designates certain products, things, or services by specific brand or trade name. Unless specifically designated in this Contract, whenever any material, process, or article is indicated or specified by grade, patent, or proprietary name or by name of manufacturer, such Specifications shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of facilitating the description of the material, process or article desired and shall be deemed to be followed by the words “or equal.”
Contractor may, unless otherwise stated, offer for substitution any material, process or article which shall be substantially equal or better in every respect to that so indicated or specified in this Contract. However, the City may have adopt ed certain uniform standards for certain materials, processes and articles. Contractor shal l submit requests, together with substantiating data, for substitution of any “or equal” material, process or article no later than thirty-five (35) days after award of the Contract. To facilitate the construction schedule and sequencing, some requests may need to be submitted before thirty-five (35) days after award of Contract. Provisions regarding submission of “or equal” requests shall not in any way authorize an extension of time for performance of this Contract. If a proposed “or equal” substitution request is rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for providing the specified material, process or article. The burden of proof as to the equality of any material, process or article shall rest with Contractor.
The City has the complete and sole discretion to determine if a material, process or article is an “or equal” material, process or artic le that may be substituted. Data required to 2 substantiate requests for substitutions of an “or equal” material, process or article data shall include a signed affidavit from Contractor stating that, an d describing how, the substituted “or equal” material, process or article is equivalent to that specified in every way except as listed on the affidavit. Substantiating data shall include any and all illustrations, specifications, and other relevant data including catalog information which describes the requested substituted “or equal” material, process or article, and substantiates that it is an “or equal” to the material, process or article. The substantiating data must also include information regarding the durability and lifecycle cost of the requested substituted “or equal” material, process or article. Failure to submit all the required substantiating data, including the signed affidavit, to the City in a timely fashion will result in th e rejection of the proposed substitution.
Contractor shall bear all of the City’s costs associated with the review of substitution requests. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs related to a substituted “or equal” material, process or article. Contractor is directed to the Special Conditions (if any) to review any findings made pursuant to Public Contract Code section 3400.
3.3 Period of Performance and Liquidated Damages. C ontractor shall perform and complete all Work under this Contract within 150 working days , beginning the effective date of the Notice to Proceed (“Contract Time”). Contractor shall perform its Work in strict accordance with any completion schedule, construction schedule or proje ct milestones developed by the City. Such schedules or milestones may be included as part of Exhibits “A” or “B” attached hereto or may be provided separately in writing to Contractor. Contractor agrees that if such Work is not completed within the aforementioned Contract Time and/or purs uant to any such completion schedule, construction schedule or project milestones developed pursuant to provisions of the Contract, it is understood, acknowledged and agreed that the City will suffer damage. Pursuant to Government Code Section 53069.85, Contractor shall pay to the City as fixed and liquidated damages the sum of $2,500 per day for each and every calendar day of delay beyond the Contract Time or beyond any completion schedule, construction schedule or Project milestones established pursuant to the Contract.
3.4 Standard of Performance; Performance of Employe es. Contractor shall perform all Work under this Contract in a skillful and workmanlike manner, and consistent with the standards generally recognized as being employed by professio nals in the same discipline in the State of California. Contractor represents and maintains that it is skilled in the professional calling necessary to perform the Work. Contractor warrants that all employees and subcontractors shall have sufficient skill and experience to perform the Work assigned to them. Finally, Contractor represents that it, its employees and subcontractors have all licenses, permits, qualifications and approvals of whatever nature that are legally required to perfor m the Work, including any required business license, and that such licenses and approvals shall be maintained throughout the term of this Contract. As provided for in the indemnification provisions of this Contract, Contractor shall perform, at its own cost and expense and without reimbursement from the City, any work necessary to correct errors or omissions which are caused by Contractor’s failure to comply with the standard of care provided for herein. Any employee who is determined by the City to be uncooperative, incompetent, a threat to the safety of persons or the Work, or any employee who fails or refuses to perform the Work in a manner acceptable to the City, shall be promptly removed from the Project by Contractor and shall not be re-employed on the Work.
3.5 Control and Payment of Subordinates; Contractua l Relationship. City retains Contractor on an independent contractor basis and C ontractor is not an employee of City. Any additional personnel performing the work governed by this Contract on behalf of Contractor shall at all times be under Contractor’s exclusive direction and control. Contractor shall pay all wages, 3 salaries, and other amounts due such personnel in c onnection with their performance under this Contract and as required by law. Contractor shall be responsible for all reports and obligations respecting such additional personnel, including, but not limited to: social security taxes, income tax withholding, unemployment insurance, and workers’ compensation insurance.
3.6 City’s Basic Obligation. City agrees to engage and does hereby engage Contractor as an independent contractor to furnish all materials and to perform all Work according to the terms and conditions herein contained for the sum set forth above. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the City shall pay to Contractor, as full consideration for the satisfactory performance by Contractor of the services and obligations required by this Contract, the below-referenced compensation in accordance with compensation provisions set forth in the Contract.
3.7 Compensation and Payment.
3.7.1 Amount of Compensation. As consideration for performance of the Work required herein, City agrees to pay Contractor the Total Contract Price of One Million, Five Hundred Fifteen Thousand, Seven Hundred Twenty Dollars ($1,515,720.00) (“Total Contract Price”) provided that such amount shall be subject to adjustment pursuant to the applicable terms of this Contract or written change orders approved and signed in advance by the City.
3.7.2 Payment of Compensation. If the Work is sche duled for completion in thirty (30) or less calendar days, City will arrange for payment of the Total Contract Price upon completion and approval by City of the Work. If the Work is scheduled for completion in more than thirty (30) calendar days, City will pay Contractor on a monthly basis as provided for herein. On or before the fifth (5th) day of each month, Contractor shall submit to the City an itemized application for payment in the format supplied by the City indicating the amount of Work completed since commencement of the Work or since the last progress payment. These applications shall be supported by evidence which is required by this Contract and such other d ocumentation as the City may require. The Contractor shall certify that the Work for which payment is requested has been done and that the materials listed are stored where indicated. Contr actor may be required to furnish a detailed schedule of values upon request of the City and in such detail and form as the City shall request, showing the quantities, unit prices, overhead, prof it, and all other expenses involved in order to provide a basis for determining the amount of progress payments.
3.7.3 Prompt Payment. City shall review and pay al l progress payment requests in accordance with the provisions set forth in Sect ion 20104.50 of the California Public Contract Code. However, no progress payments will be made for Work not completed in accordance with this Contract. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, rules and regulations relating to the proper payment of its employees, subcontractors, suppliers, or others.
3.7.4 Contract Retentions. From each approved progr ess estimate, five percent (5%) will be deducted and retained by the City, and the remainder will be paid to Contractor. All Contract retention shall be released and paid to Co ntractor and subcontractors pursuant to California Public Contract Code Section 7107.
3.7.5 Other Retentions. In addition to Contract retentions, the City may deduct from each progress payment an amount necessary to p rotect City from loss because of: (1) liquidated damages which have accrued as of the date of the application for payment; (2) any sums expended by the City in performing any of Contracto r’s obligations under the Contract which Contractor has failed to perform or has performed inadequately; (3) defective Work not remedied; (4) stop notices as allowed by state law; (5) reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for 4 the unpaid balance of the Total Contract Price or w ithin the scheduled completion date; (6) unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work by Contractor; (7) unauthorized deviations from the Contract; (8) failure of Contractor to maintain or submit on a timely basis proper and sufficient documentation as required by the Contract or by City during the p rosecution of the Work; (9) erroneous or false estimates by Contractor of the value of the Work performed; (10) any sums representing expenses, losses, or damages as determined by the City, incur red by the City for which Contractor is liable under the Contract; and (11) any other sums which the City is entitled to recover from Contractor under the terms of the Contract or pursuant to stat e law, including Section 1727 of the California Labor Code. The failure by the City to deduct any of these sums from a progress payment shall not constitute a waiver of the City’s right to such sums.
3.7.6 Substitutions for Contract Retentions. In ac cordance with California Public Contract Code Section 22300, the City will permit t he substitution of securities for any monies withheld by the City to ensure performance under th e Contract. At the request and expense of Contractor, securities equivalent to the amount withheld shall be deposited with the City, or with a state or federally chartered bank in California as the escrow agent, and thereafter the City shall then pay such monies to Contractor as they come due. Upon satisfactory completion of the Contract, the securities shall be returned to Contractor. For purposes of this Section and Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code, the term “satisfactory completion of the contract” shall mean the time the City has issued written final acceptance of the Work and filed a Notice of Completion as required by law and provisions of this Contract. Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any securities substituted for monies withheld and shall receive any interest thereon. The escrow agreement used for the purposes of this Section shall be in the form provided by the City.
3.7.7 Title to Work. As security for partial, prog ress, or other payments, title to Work for which such payments are made shall pass to the City at the time of payment. To the extent that title has not previously been vested in the City by reason of payments, full title shall pass to the City at delivery of the Work at the destinat ion and time specified in this Contract. Such transferred title shall in each case be good, free and clear from any and all security interests, liens, or other encumbrances. Contractor promises and agr ees that it will not pledge, hypothecate, or otherwise encumber the items in any manner that would result in any lien, security interest, charge, or claim upon or against said items. Such transfer of title shall not imply acceptance by the City, nor relieve Contractor from the responsibility to strictly comply with the Contract and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any loss of or damage to items.
3.7.8 Labor and Material Releases. Contractor shal l furnish City with labor and material releases from all subcontractors performing work on, or furnishing materials for, the Work governed by this Contract prior to final payment by City.
3.7.9 Prevailing Wages. Contractor is aware of the requirements of California Labor Code Section 1720 et seq., and 1770 et seq., as well as California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 16000 et seq., (“Prevailing Wage Laws”), which require the payment of prevailing wage rates and the performance of other requirements on “public works” and “maintenance” projects.
Since the Services are being performed as part of a n applicable “public works” or “maintenance” project, as defined by the Prevailing Wage Laws, an d since the total compensation is $1,000 or more, Contractor agrees to fully comply with such P revailing Wage Laws. City shall provide Contractor with a copy of the prevailing rates of per diem wages in effect at the commencement of this Contract upon request. Contractor shall make copies of the prevailing rates of per diem wages for each craft, classification or type of worker needed to execute the Services available to interested parties upon request and shall post copies at Contr actor’s principal place of business and at the project site. Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its officials, officers, employees 5 and agents free and harmless from any claim or liability arising out of any failure or alleged failure to comply with the Prevailing Wage Laws. Contractor and any subcontractor shall forfeit a penalty of up to $200 per calendar day or portion thereof for each worker paid less than the prevailing wage rates.
3.7.10 Apprenticeable Crafts. When Contractor empl oys workmen in an apprenticeable craft or trade, Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 1777.5 of the California Labor Code with respect to the employmen t of properly registered apprentices upon public works. The primary responsibility for compl iance with said section for all apprenticeable occupations shall be with Contractor. The Contractor or any subcontractor that is determined by the Labor Commissioner to have knowingly violated Section 1777.5 shall forfeit as a civil penalty an amount not exceeding $100 for each full calendar day of noncompliance, or such greater amount as provided by law.
3.7.11 Hours of Work. Contractor is advised that eight (8) hours labor constitutes a legal day’s work. Pursuant to Section 1813 of the California Labor Code, Contractor shall forfeit a penalty of $25.00 per worker for each day that each worker is permitted to work more than eight (8) hours in any one calendar day and forty (40) hours in any one calendar week, except when payment for overtime is made at not less than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the basic rate for that worker.
3.7.12 Payroll Records. Contractor and each subcontractor shall keep an accurate payroll record, showing the name, address, social s ecurity number, work classification, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeym an, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed by him or her in connection with the public work. The payroll records shall be certified and shall be available for inspection at all reasonable hours at the principal office of Contractor in the manner provided in Labor Code section 1776. In the event of noncompliance with the requirements of this section, Contractor shall have 10 days in which to comply subsequent to receipt of written notice specifying in what respects such Contractor must comply with t his section. Should noncompliance still be evident after such 10-day period, Contractor shall, as a penalty to City, forfeit not more than $100.00 fo r each calendar day or portion thereof, for each worker, until strict compliance is effectuated. The amount of the forfeiture is to be determined by the Labor Commissioner. A contractor who is found to have violated the provis ions of law regarding wages on Public Works with the intent to defraud shall be ineligible to bid on Public Works contracts for a period of one to three years as determined by the Labor Commissioner. Upon the request of the Di vision of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, such penalties shall be withheld from progress paym ents then due. The responsibility for compliance with this section is on Contractor. The requirement to submit certified payroll records dir ectly to the Labor Commissioner under Labor Code section 1771.4 shall not apply to work performed on a public works project that is exempt pursuant to the small project exemption specified in Labor Code Section 1771.4.
3.7.13 Contractor and Subcontractor Registration. Pursuant to Labor Code sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, all contractors and subcontractors that wish to bid on, be listed in a bid proposal, or enter into a contract to perform public work must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations. No bid will be accepted nor any contract entered into without proof of the 6 contractor’s and subcontractors’ current registration with the Department of Industrial Relations to perform public work. Contractor is directed to rev iew, fill out and execute the Public Works Contractor Registration Certification attached here to as Exhibit “E” prior to contract execution.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the contractor registration requirements mandated by Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1 shall not apply to work performed on a public works project that is exempt pursuant to the small project exemption spec ified in Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1.
3.7.14 Labor Compliance; Stop Orders. This Project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. It shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility to evaluate and pay the cost of complying with all labor compliance requirements under this Contract and applicable law. Any stop o rders issued by the Department of Industrial Relations against Contractor or any subcontractor t hat affect Contractor’s performance of Work, including any delay, shall be Contractor’s sole responsibility. Any delay arising out of or resulting from such stop orders shall be considered Contracto r caused delay subject to any applicable liquidated damages and shall not be compensable by the City. Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its officials, officers, employees and agents free and harmless from any claim or liability arising out of stop orders issued by the Department of Industrial Relations against Contractor or any subcontractor.
3.8 Performance of Work; Jobsite Obligations.
3.8.1 Water Quality Management and Compliance.
3.8.1.1 Water Quality Management and Compliance. Co ntractor shall keep itself and all subcontractors, staff, an d employees fully informed of and in compliance with all local, state and federal laws, rules and r egulations that may impact, or be implicated by the performance of the Work including, without limi tation, all applicable provisions of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 U.S.C. §§ 1300); th e California Porter-Cologne Water Quality Control Act (Cal Water Code §§ 13000-14950); local ordinances regulating discharges of storm water; and any and all regulations, policies, or pe rmits issued pursuant to any such authority regulating the discharge of pollutants, as that ter m is used in the Porter-Cologne Water Quality Control Act, to any ground or surface water in the State.
3.8.1.2 Compliance with the Statewide Construction General Permit. Contractor shall comply with all conditions of the most recent iteration of the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System General Perm it for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity, issued by the Californi a State Water Resources Control Board (“Permit”). It shall be Contractor’s sole responsibility to file a Notice of Intent and procure coverage under the Permit for all construction activity whic h results in the disturbance of more than one acre of total land area or which is part of a large r common area of development or sale. Prior to initiating work, Contractor shall be solely respons ible for preparing and implementing a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by the Permit. Contractor shall be responsible for procuring, implementing and complyi ng with the provisions of the Permit and the SWPPP, including the standard provisions, and monit oring and reporting requirements as required by the Permit. The Permit requires the SW PPP to be a “living document” that changes as necessary to meet the conditions and requirement s of the job site as it progresses through difference phases of construction and is subject to different weather conditions. It shall be Contractor’s sole responsibility to update the SWPP P as necessary to address conditions at the project site.
7 3.8.1.3 Other Water Quality Rules Regulations and P olicies.
Contractor shall comply with the lawful requirements of any applicable municipality, drainage City, or local agency regarding discharges of storm water to separate storm drain systems or other watercourses under their jurisdiction, including applicable requirements in municipal storm water management programs.
3.8.1.4 Cost of Compliance. Storm, surface, nuisanc e, or other waters may be encountered at various times during c onstruction of The Work. Therefore, the Contractor, by submitting a Bid, hereby acknowledges that it has investigated the risk arising from such waters, has prepared its Bid accordingly, and assumes any and all risks and liabilities arising therefrom.
3.8.1.5 Liability for Non-Compliance. Failure to co mply with the Permit is a violation of federal and state law. Pu rsuant to the indemnification provisions of this Contract, Contractor hereby agrees to defend, indem nify and hold harmless the City and its officials, officers, employees, volunteers and agen ts for any alleged violations. In addition, City may seek damages from Contractor for any delay in completing the Work in accordance with the Contract, if such delay is caused by or related to Contractor’s failure to comply with the Permit.
3.8.1.6 Reservation of Right to Defend. City reserv es the right to defend any enforcement action brought against the City for Contractor’s failure to comply with the Permit or any other relevant water quality law, reg ulation, or policy. Pursuant to the indemnification provisions of this Contract, Contra ctor hereby agrees to be bound by, and to reimburse the City for the costs (including the Cit y’s attorney’s fees) associated with, any settlement reached between the City and the relevant enforcement entity.
3.8.1.7 Training. In addition to the standard of pe rformance requirements set forth in paragraph 3.4, Contractor warrants that all employees and subcontractors shall have sufficient skill and expe rience to perform the Work assigned to them without impacting water quality in violation of the laws, regulations and policies described in paragraph 3.8.1. Contractor further warrants that it, its employees and subcontractors will receive adequate training, as determined by City, regarding the requirements of the laws, regulations and policies described in paragraph 3.8.1 as they may r elate to the Work provided under this Agreement. Upon request, City will provide the Cont ractor with a list of training programs that meet the requirements of this paragraph.
3.8.2 Safety. Contractor shall execute and maintai n its work so as to avoid injury or damage to any person or property. Contractor sh all comply with the requirements of the specifications relating to safety measures applicable in particular operations or kinds of work. In carrying out its Work, Contractor shall at all times be in compliance with all applicable local, state and federal laws, rules and regulations, and shall exercise all necessary precautions for the safety of employees appropriate to the nature of the Work and the conditions under which the Work is to be performed. Safety precautions as applicable shall include, but shall not be limited to, adequate life protection and lifesaving equipment; adequate illumination for underground and night operations; instructions in accident prevention for all employees, such as machinery guards, safe walkways, scaffolds, ladders, bridges, gang planks, confined space procedures, trenching and shoring, fall protection and other safety devices, equipment and wearing apparel as are necessary or lawfully required to prevent accidents or injuries; and adequate facilities for the proper inspection and maintenance of all safety measures. Furthermor e, Contractor shall prominently display the names and telephone numbers of at least two medical doctors practicing in the vicinity of the Project, 8 as well as the telephone number of the local ambulance service, adjacent to all telephones at the Project site.
3.8.3 Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall keep itself fully informed of and in compliance with all local, state and federal laws, rules and regulations in any manner affecting the performance of the Contract or the Work, including all Cal/OSHA requirements, and shall give all notices required by law. Contractor shall be liable for all violations of such laws and regulations in connection with Work. If Contractor observes that the drawings or specifications are at variance with any law, rule or regulation, it shall promptly notify the City in writing. Any necessary changes shall be made by written change order. If Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, rules and regulations and without giving written notice to the City, Contractor shall be solely responsible for all costs arising therefrom. City is a public entity of the State of Californi a subject to certain provisions of the Health & Safety Code, Government Code, Public Contract Code, and Labor Code of the State. It is stipulated and agreed that all provisions of the law applicable to the public contracts of a municipality are a part of this Contract to the same extent as though set forth herein and will be complied with. Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold City, its officials, officers, employees and agents free and harmless, pursuant to the indemnification provisions of this Contract, from any claim or liability arising out of any failure or alleged failure to comply with such laws, rules or regulations.
3.8.4 Permits and Licenses. Contractor shall be re sponsible for securing City permits and licenses necessary to perform the Work described herein, including, but not limited to, any required business license. While Contractor wi ll not be charged a fee for any City permits, Contractor shall pay the City’s business license fee, if any. Any ineligible contractor or subcontractor pursuant to Labor Code Sections 1777.1 and 1777.7 may not perform work on this Project.
3.8.5 Trenching Work. If the Total Contract Price exceeds $25,000 and if the Work governed by this Contract entails excavation of any trench or trenches five (5) feet or more in depth, Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the California Labor Code, including Section 6705. To this end, Contractor shall submit for City’s review and approval a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of such trench or trenches. If such plan varies from the shoring system standards, the plan shall b e prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer.
3.8.6 Hazardous Materials and Differing Conditions. As required by California Public Contract Code Section 7104, if this Contract involves digging trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four (4) feet below the sur face, Contractor shall promptly, and prior to disturbance of any conditions, notify City of: (1) any material discovered in excavation that Contractor believes to be a hazardous waste that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II or Class III disposal site; (2) subsurface or latent p hysical conditions at the site differing from those indicated by City; and (3) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature at the site, significantly different from those ordinarily encountered in such contract work. Upon notification, City shall promptly investigate the conditions to determine wh ether a change order is appropriate. In the event of a dispute, Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date and shall proceed with all Work to be performed under the Contract, but shall retain all rights provided by the Contract or by law for making protests and resolving the dispute.
3.8.7 Underground Utility Facilities. To the exten t required by Section 4215 of the California Government Code, City shall compensate Contractor for the costs of: (1) locating and repairing damage to underground utility facilities not caused by the failure of Contractor to exercise 9 reasonable care; (2) removing or relocating undergr ound utility facilities not indicated in the construction drawings; and (3) equipment necessarily idled during such work. Contractor shall not be assessed liquidated damages for delay caused by failure of City to provide for removal or relocation of such utility facilities.
3.8.8 Air Quality. Contractor must fully comply wi th all applicable laws, rules and regulations in furnishing or using equipment and/or providing services, including, but not limited to, emissions limits and permitting requirements impose d by the California Air Resources Board (CARB). Although CARB limits and requirements are more broad, Contractor shall specifically be aware of their application to "portable equipment", which definition is considered by CARB to include any item of equipment with a fuel-powered engine. Contractor shall indemnify City against any fines or penalties imposed by CARB, or any other governme ntal or regulatory agency for violations of applicable laws, rules and/or regulations by Contractor, its subcontractors, or others for whom Contractor is responsible under its indemnity obligations provided for in this Agreement.
3.8.9 State Recycling Mandates. Contractor shall co mply with State Recycling Mandates. Any recyclable materials/debris collected by the contractor that can be feasibly diverted via reuse or recycling must be hauled by the appropriate handler for reuse or recycling.
3.9 Completion of Work. When Contractor determines that it has completed the Work required herein, Contractor shall so notify City i n writing and shall furnish all labor and material releases required by this Contract. City shall the reupon inspect the Work. If the Work is not acceptable to the City, the City shall indicate to Contractor in writing the specific portions or items of Work which are unsatisfactory or incomplete. Once Contractor determines that it has completed the incomplete or unsatisfactory Work, Contractor may request a reinspection by the City. Once the Work is acceptable to City, City shall pay to Contractor the Total Contract Price remaining to be paid, less any amount which City may be authorized or directed by law to retain. Payment of retention proceeds due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with Section 7107 of the California Public Contract Code.
3.10 Claims; Government Code Claim Compliance.
3.10.1 Intent. Effective January 1, 1991, Section 20104 et seq., of the California Public Contract Code prescribes a process utilizing informal conferences, non-binding judicial supervised mediation, and judicial arbitration to resolve disputes on construction claims of $375,000 or less. Effective January 1, 2017, Section 9204 of the Public Contract Code prescribes a process for negotiation and mediation to resolve disputes on construction claims. The intent of this Section is to implement Sections 20104 et seq. and Section 9204 of the California Public Contract Code.
This Section shall be construed to be consistent with said statutes.
3.10.2 Claims. For purposes of this Section, “Claim” means a separate demand by the Contractor, after a change order duly requested in accordance with the terms of this Contract has been denied by the City, for (A) a time extensi on, (B) payment of money or damages arising from Work done by or on behalf of the Contractor pursuant to the Contract, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the City. Claims governed by this Section may not be filed unless and until the Contractor completes all procedures for giving notice of delay or change and for the requesting of a time extension or change order, including but not necessarily limited to the change order procedures contained herein, and Contractor’s request for a change has been denied in whole or in part. Claims governed by this Section must b e filed no later than fourteen (14) days after a request for change has been denied in whole or in p art or after any other event giving rise to the Claim. The Claim shall be submitted in writing to the City and shall include on its first page the 10 following in 16 point capital font: “THIS IS A CLAI M.” Furthermore, the claim shall include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Nothing in this Section is intended to extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filing of claims, including all requirements pertaining to compensation or payment for extra Work, disputed Work, and/or changed conditions. Failure to follow such contractual requirements shall bar any claims or subsequent lawsuits for compensation or payment thereon.
3.10.3 Supporting Documentation. The Contractor sh all submit all claims in the following format:
3.10.3.1 Summary of claim merit and price, referenc e Contract Document provisions pursuant to which the claim is made
3.10.3.2 List of documents relating to claim:
(A) Specifications
(B) Drawings
(C) Clarifications (Requests for Information)
(D) Schedules
(E) Other
3.10.3.3 Chronology of events and correspondence
3.10.3.4 Analysis of claim merit
3.10.3.5 Analysis of claim cost
3.10.3.6 Time impact analysis in CPM format
3.10.3.7 If Contractor’s claim is based in whole or in part on an allegation of errors or omissions in the Drawings or Specifications for the Project, Contractor shall provide a summary of the percentage of the claim subject to design errors or omissions and shall obtain a certificate of merit in support of the claim of design errors and omissions.
3.10.3.8 Cover letter and certification of validity of the claim, including any claims from subcontractors of any tier, in accordance with Government Code section 12650 et seq .
3.10.4 City’s Response. Upon receipt of a claim pursuant to this Section, City shall conduct a reasonable review of the claim and, within a period not to exceed 45 days, shall provide the Contractor a written statement identifying what portion of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim will be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement.
3.10.4.1 If City needs approval from its governing body to provide the Contractor a written statement identifying the disp uted portion and the undisputed portion of the claim, and the governing body does not meet within the 45 days or within the mutually agreed to extension of time following receipt of a claim sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, City shall have up to three days following the next duly publicly noticed meeting of the 11 governing body after the 45-day period, or extensio n, expires to provide the Contractor a written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion.
3.10.4.2 Within 30 days of receipt of a claim, City may request in writing additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses or claims City may have against the Contractor. If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of City and the Contractor.
3.10.4.3 City’s written response to the claim, as f urther documented, shall be submitted to the Contractor within 30 day s (if the claim is less than $50,000, within 15 days) after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the Contractor in producing the additional information or requested documentation, whichever is greater.
3.10.5 Meet and Confer. If the Contractor disputes City’s written response, or City fails to respond within the time prescribed, the Contractor may so notify City, in writing, either within 15 days of receipt of City’s response or within 15 days of City’s failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon receipt of a demand, City shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute.
3.10.6 Mediation. Within 10 business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion of the claim remains in dispute, City shall provide the Contractor a written statement identifying the portion of the claim that remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed. Any payment due on an u ndisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after City issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the claim, as identified by the Contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with City and the Contractor sharing the associated cost s equally. City and Contractor shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business days after t he disputed portion of the claim has been identified in writing, unless the parties agree to select a mediator at a later time.
3.10.6.1 If the Parties cannot agree upon a mediato r, each Party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the claim. Each Party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator.
3.10.6.2 For purposes of this section, mediation in cludes any nonbinding process, including, but not limited to, neutral evaluation or a dispute review board, in which an independent third party or board assists t he Parties in dispute resolution through negotiation or by issuance of an evaluation. Any mediation utilized shall conform to the timeframes in this section.
3.10.6.3 Unless otherwise agreed to by City and the Contractor in writing, the mediation conducted pursuant to this section shall excuse any further obligation under Section 20104.4 to mediate after litigation has been commenced.
3.10.6.4 The mediation shall be held no earlier tha n the date the Contractor completes the Work or the date that the Contractor last performs Work, whichever is earlier. All unresolved claims shall be considered jointly in a single mediation, unless a new unrelated claim arises after mediation is completed.
12 3.10.7 Procedures After Mediation. If following th e mediation, the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the Contractor must file a claim pursuant to Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the Contractor submits his or her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time the claim is denied, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer conference or mediation.
3.10.8 Civil Actions. The following procedures are established for all civil actions filed to resolve claims subject to this Section:
3.10.8.1 Within 60 days, but no earlier than 30 day s, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court shall submit the matter to non-binding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties or unless mediation was held prior to commencement of the action in accordance with Public Contract Code section 9204 and the terms of these procedures..
The mediation process shall provide for the selecti on within 15 days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be co mmenced within 30 days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 days from the commence ment of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court.
3.10.8.2 If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding Section 1114.11 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act of 1986 (Article 3 (commencing with Section 2016) of Chapter 3 of Title 3 of Part 4 of the Code of Civil Procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under this subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration.
3.10.8.3 In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing wit h Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, (A) arbitrators shall, when possible, be experienced in construction law, and (B) any party appealing an arbitration award who does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter, also pay the attorney’s fees on appeal of the other party.
3.10.9 Government Code Claims. In addition to any and all contract requirements pertaining to notices of and requests for compensation or payment for extra work, disputed work, claims and/or changed conditions, Contractor must comply with the claim procedures set forth in Government Code sections 900 et seq. prior to filin g any lawsuit against the City. Such Government Code claims and any subsequent lawsuit based upon the Government Code claims shall be limited to those matters that remain unres olved after all procedures pertaining to extra work, disputed work, claims, and/or changed conditions have been followed by Contractor. If no such Government Code claim is submitted, or if any prerequisite contractual requirements are not otherwise satisfied as specified herein, Contractor shall be barred from bringing and maintaining a valid lawsuit against the City. A Government Cod e claim must be filed no earlier than the date the work is completed or the date the Contractor last performs work on the Project, whichever occurs first. A Government Code claim shall be inclusive of all unresolved claims unless a new unrelated claim arises after the Government Code claim is submitted.
3.10.10 Non-Waiver. City’s failure to respond to a claim from the Contractor within the time periods described in this Section or to otherwise meet the time requirements of this Section shall result in the claim being deemed rejected in its entirety. City’s failure to respond shall not waive City’s rights to any subsequent procedures for the resolution of disputed claims. 13 3.11 Loss and Damage. Except as may otherwise be l imited by law, Contractor shall be responsible for all loss and damage which may arise out of the nature of the Work agreed to herein, or from the action of the elements, or from any unf oreseen difficulties which may arise or be encountered in the prosecution of the Work until the same is fully completed and accepted by City.
3.12 Indemnification.
3.12.1 Scope of Indemnity . To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers free and harmless from any and all claim s, demands, causes of action, suits, actions, proceedings, costs, expenses, liability, judgments, awards, decrees, settlements, loss, damage or injury of any kind, in law or equity, to property o r persons, including wrongful death, (collectively, “Claims”) in any manner arising out of, pertaining to, or incident to any alleged acts, errors or omissions, or willful misconduct of Contractor, its officials, officers, employees, subcontractors, consultants or agents in connection with the performance of the Contractor’s services, the Project or this Agreement, including without limitation the payment of all consequential damages, expert witness fees and attorneys’ fees and other related costs and expenses. Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent required by Civil Code section 2782, Contractor’s indemnity obligation shall not apply to liability for damages for death or bodily injury to persons, injury to property, or any other loss, damage or expense arising from the sole or active negligence or willful misconduct of the City or the City’s agents, servants, or independent contractors who are directly responsible to the City, or for defects in design furnished by those persons.
3.12.2 Additional Indemnity Obligations . Contractor shall defend, with counsel of City’s choosing and at Contractor's own cost, expense and risk, any and all Claims covered by this section that may be brought or inst ituted against City or its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers. In addition, Contractor shall pay and satisfy any judgment, award or decree that may be rendered against City or its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers as part of any such claim, suit, action or other proceeding. Contractor shall also reimburse City for the cost of any settlement paid by City or its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers as part of any such claim, su it, action or other proceeding. Such reimbursement shall include payment for City's attorney's fees and costs, including expert witness fees. Contractor shall reimburse City and its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers, for any and all legal expenses and costs incurred b y each of them in connection therewith or in enforcing the indemnity herein provided. Contractor's obligation to indemnify shall not be restricted to insurance proceeds, if any, received by the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers.
3.13 Insurance.
3.13.1 Time for Compliance. Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until it has provided evidence satisfactory to the City that it has secured all insurance required under this section. In addition, Contractor shall not allow any subcontractor to commence work on any subcontract until it has provided evidence satisfactory to the City that the subcontractor has secured all insurance required under this section. Failure to provide and maintain all required insurance shall be grounds for the City to terminate this Contract for cause.
3.13.2 Minimum Requirements. Contractor shall, at its expense, procure and maintain for the duration of the Contract insur ance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in conn ection with the performance of the Work 14 hereunder by Contractor, its agents, representative s, employees or subcontractors. Contractor shall also require all of its subcontractors to pro cure and maintain the same insurance for the duration of the Contract. Such insurance shall mee t at least the following minimum levels of coverage:
3.13.2.1 Minimum Scope of Insurance. Coverage shal l be at least as broad as the latest version of the following: (1) General Liability: Insurance Services Office Commercial General Liability coverage (occurrence form CG 00 01) OR Insurance Services Office Owners and Contractors Protective Liability Coverage Form (CG 00 09 11 88) (coverage for operations of designated contractor); (2) Automobile Liability: Insurance Services Office Business Auto Coverage form number CA 00 01, code 1 (any auto); and (3) Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability: Workers’ Compensation insurance as required by the State of California and Employer’s Liability Insurance. Policies shall not contain exclusions contrary to this Contract.
3.13.2.2 Minimum Limits of Insurance. Contractor s hall maintain limits no less than: (1) General Liability: $5,000,000 per occurrence and $5,000,000 aggregate for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage; (2) Automobile Liability: $5,000,000 per accident for bodily injury and property damage; and (3) Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability:
Workers’ compensation limits as required by the Labor Code of the State of California. Employer’s Liability limits of $1,000,000 each accident, policy limit bodily injury or disease, and each employee bodily injury or disease. Defense costs shall be available in addition to the limits. Notwithstanding the minimum limits specified herein, any available coverage shall be provided to the parties required to be named as additional insureds pursuant to this Contract.
3.13.3 Insurance Endorsements. The insurance poli cies shall contain the following provisions, or Contractor shall provide endorsements (amendments) on forms supplied or approved by the City to add the following provisions to the insurance policies:
3.13.3.1 General Liability. (1) Such policy shall give the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunte ers additional insured status using ISO endorsements CG20 10 10 01 plus CG20 37 10 01, or e ndorsements providing the exact same coverage, with respect to the Work or operations performed by or on behalf of Contractor, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work; (2) all policies shall waive or shall permit Contractor to waive all rights of subrogation which may be obtained by the Contractor or any insurer by virtue of payment of any loss or any coverage provided to any person named as an additional insured pursuant to this Contract, and Contractor agrees to waive all such rights of subrogation; and (3) the insurance coverage shall b e primary insurance as respects the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunte ers, or if excess, shall stand in an unbroken chain of coverage excess of Contractor’s scheduled underlying coverage. Any insurance or self- insurance maintained by the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers shall be excess of Contractor’s insurance and shall not be called upon to contribute with it.
3.13.3.2 Automobile Liability. (1) Such policy sha ll give the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers additional insured status with respect to the ownership, operation, maintenance, use, loading or unloading of any auto owned, leased, hired or borrowed by Contractor or for which Contractor is responsible; (2) all policies shall waive or shall permit Contractor to waive all rights of subrogation which may be obtained by the Contractor or any insurer by virtue of payment of any loss or any cov erage provided to any person named as an additional insured pursuant to this Contract, and C ontractor agrees to waive all such rights of subrogation; and (3) the insurance coverage shall b e primary insurance as respects the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunte ers, or if excess, shall stand in an unbroken 15 chain of coverage excess of Contractor’s scheduled underlying coverage. Any insurance or self- insurance maintained by the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers shall be excess of Contractor’s insurance and shall not be called upon to contribute with it in any way.
3.13.3.3 Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liabi lity Coverage.
The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers for losses paid un der the terms of the insurance policy which arise from work performed by Contractor.
3.13.3.4 All Coverages. Each insurance policy requ ired by this Contract shall be endorsed to state that: (1) coverage shall not be suspended, voided, reduced or canceled except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the City; and (2) any failure to comply with reporting or other provisions of the policies, including breaches of warranties, shall not affect coverage provided to the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers.
3.13.4 Separation of Insureds; No Special Limitati ons. All insurance required by this Section shall contain standard separation of insureds provisions. In addition, such insurance shall not contain any special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers.
3.13.5 Deductibles and Self-Insurance Retentions. Any deductibles or self- insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the City. Contractor shall guarantee that, at the option of the City, either: (1) the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self- insured retentions as respects the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers; or (2) the Contractor shall procure a bond or other financial guarantee acceptable to the City guaranteeing payment of losses and related investig ation costs, claims and administrative and defense expenses.
3.13.6 Acceptability of Insurers. Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M. Best’s rating no less than A:VII, licensed to do business in California, and satisfactory to the City. Exception may be made for the State C ompensation Insurance Fund when not specifically rated.
3.13.7 Verification of Coverage. Contractor shall furnish City with original certificates of insurance and endorsements effecting coverage required by this Contract on forms satisfactory to the City. The certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy shall be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf, and shall be on forms supplied or approved by the City. All certificates and endorsements must be received and approved by the City before work commences. The City reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, at any time.
3.13.8 Subcontractors. All subcontractors shall m eet the requirements of this Section before commencing Work. Contractor sh all furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. Subcontractor policies of General Liability insurance shall name the City, its officials, employees, agents and authorized volunteers as additional insureds using form ISO 20 38 04 13 or endorsements providing the exact same coverage. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the r equirements stated herein except as otherwise agreed to by the City in writing.
16 3.13.9 Reporting of Claims. Contractor shall repo rt to the City, in addition to Contractor’s insurer, any and all insurance claims submitted by Contractor in connection with the Work under this Contract.
3.14 Bond Requirements.
3.14.1 Payment Bond. If required by law or otherwise specifically requested by City in Exhibit “C” attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference, Contractor shall execute and provide to City concurrently with this Contract a Payment Bond in an amount required by the City and in a form provided or approved by the City. If such bond is required, no payment will be made to Contractor until the bond has been received and approved by the City.
3.14.2 Performance Bond. If specifically requested by City in Exhibit “C” attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference, Contra ctor shall execute and provide to City concurrently with this Contract a Performance Bond in an amount required by the City and in a form provided or approved by the City. If such bon d is required, no payment will be made to Contractor until the bond has been received and approved by the City.
3.14.3 Bond Provisions. Should, in City’s sole opi nion, any bond become insufficient or any surety be found to be unsatisfa ctory, Contractor shall renew or replace the effected bond within (ten) 10 days of receiving notice from City. In the event the surety or Contractor intends to reduce or cancel any required bond, at least thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the City, and Contractor shall post accept able replacement bonds at least ten (10) days prior to expiration of the original bonds. No further payments shall be deemed due or will be made under this Contract until any replacement bonds required by this Section are accepted by the City.
To the extent, if any, that the Total Contract Pric e is increased in accordance with the Contract, Contractor shall, upon request of the City, cause the amount of the bond to be increased accordingly and shall promptly deliver satisfactory evidence of such increase to the City. If Contractor fails to furnish any required bond, the City may terminate the Contract for cause.
3.14.4 Surety Qualifications. Only bonds executed by an admitted surety insurer, as defined in California Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120, shall be accepted. If a California- admitted surety insurer issuing bonds does not meet these requirements, the insurer will be considered qualified if it is in conformance with S ection 995.660 of the California Code of Civil Procedure, and proof of such is provided to the City.
3.15 Warranty. Contractor warrants all Work under the Contract (which for purposes of this Section shall be deemed to include unauthorized work which has not been removed and any non-conforming materials incorporated into the Work ) to be of good quality and free from any defective or faulty material and workmanship. Contractor agrees that for a period of one year (or the period of time specified elsewhere in the Contract or in any guarantee or warranty provided by any manufacturer or supplier of equipment or materi als incorporated into the Work, whichever is later) after the date of final acceptance, Contractor shall within ten (10) days after being notified in writing by the City of any defect in the Work or no n-conformance of the Work to the Contract, commence and prosecute with due diligence all Work necessary to fulfill the terms of the warranty at its sole cost and expense. Contractor shall act sooner as requested by the City in response to an emergency. In addition, Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, repair and replace any portions of the Work (or work of other contractors) damaged by its defective Work or which becomes damaged in the course of repairing or replacing def ective Work. For any Work so corrected, Contractor’s obligation hereunder to correct defective Work shall be reinstated for an additional one year period, commencing with the date of acceptance of such corrected Work. Contractor shall 17 perform such tests as the City may require to verify that any corrective actions, including, without limitation, redesign, repairs, and replacements comply with the requirements of the Contract. All costs associated with such corrective actions and testing, including the removal, replacement, and reinstitution of equipment and materials necessary to gain access, shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor. All warranties and guarantees of subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers with respect to any portion of the Work, whether express or implied, are deemed to be obtained by Contractor for the benefit of the City, regardless of whether or not such warranties and guarantees have been transferred or assigned to the City by se parate agreement and Contractor agrees to enforce such warranties and guarantees, if necessar y, on behalf of the City. In the event that Contractor fails to perform its obligations under this Section, or under any other warranty or guaranty under this Contract, to the reasonable satisfaction of the City, the City shall have the right to correct and replace any defective or non-conforming Work an d any work damaged by such work or the replacement or correction thereof at Contractor’s sole expense. Contractor shall be obligated to fully reimburse the City for any expenses incurred hereunder upon demand.
3.16 Employee/Labor Certifications.
3.16.1 Contractor’s Labor Certification. By its si gnature hereunder, Contractor certifies that he is aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the California Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for Worker’s Compensation or to undertake self- insurance in accordance with the provisions of that Code, and agrees to comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the Work. A c ertification form for this purpose, which is attached to this Contract as Exhibit “D” and incorp orated herein by reference, shall be executed simultaneously with this Contract.
3.16.2 Equal Opportunity Employment. Contractor re presents that it is an equal opportunity employer and that it shall not discrimi nate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, national origin, ancestry, sex, age or other interests protected by the State or Federal Constitutions. Such non-discrimination shall include, but not be limited to, all activities related to initial employment, upgrading, demotion, transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination.
3.16.3 Verification of Employment Eligibility. By executing this Contract, Contractor verifies that it fully complies with all requirements and restrictions of state and federal law respecting the employment of undocumented aliens, including, but not limited to, the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, as may be amended from time to time, and shall require all subcontractors and sub-subcontractors to comply with the same.
3.17 General Provisions.
3.17.1 City’s Representative. The City hereby designates the General Manager, or his or her designee, to act as its representative f or the performance of this Contract (“City’s Representative”). City’s Representative shall have the power to act on behalf of the City for all purposes under this Contract. Contractor shall not accept direction or orders from any person other than the City’s Representative or his or her designee.
3.17.2 Contractor’s Representative. Before startin g the Work, Contractor shall submit in writing the name, qualifications and experience of its proposed representative who shall be subject to the review and approval of the City ( “′Contractor’s Representative”). Following approval by the City, Contractor’s Representative shall have full authority to represent and act on behalf of Contractor for all purposes under this Co ntract. Contractor’s Representative shall 18 supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention, and shall be responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for the satisfactory coordination of all portions of the Work under this Contract. Contractor’s Representative shall devote full time to the Project and either he or hi s designee, who shall be acceptable to the City, shall be present at the Work site at all times that any Work is in progress and at any time that any employee or subcontractor of Contractor is present at the Work site. Arrangements for responsible supervision, acceptable to the City, shall be made for emergency Work which may be required.
Should Contractor desire to change its Contractor’s Representative, Contractor shall provide the information specified above and obtain the City’s written approval.
3.17.3 Termination. This Contract may be terminate d by City at any time, either with or without cause, by giving Contractor three (3) days advance written notice. In the event of termination by City for any reason other than the fault of Contractor, City shall pay Contractor for all Work performed up to that time as provided herein. In the event of breach of the Contract by Contractor, City may terminate the Contract immedia tely without notice, may reduce payment to Contractor in the amount necessary to offset City’s resulting damages, and may pursue any other available recourse against Contractor. Contractor may not terminate this Contract except for cause.
In the event this Contract is terminated in whole or in part as provided, City may procure, upon such terms and in such manner as it may determine approp riate, services similar to those terminated.
Further, if this Contract is terminated as provided, City may require Contractor to provide all finished or unfinished documents, data, diagrams, drawings, materials or other matter prepared or built by Contractor in connection with its performance of this Contract.
3.17.4 Contract Interpretation. Should any question arise regarding the meaning or import of any of the provisions of this Contract or written or oral instructions from City, the matter shall be referred to City’s Representative, whose decision
3.17.5 Anti-Trust Claims. This provision shall be o perative if this Contract is applicable to California Public Contract Code Secti on 7103.5. In entering into this Contract to supply goods, services or materials, Contractor hereby offers and agrees to assign to the City all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Section 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2, commencing with Section 16700, of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code) arising from purchases of goods, services, or materials pursuant to the Contr act. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the City tender final payment to Contractor, without further acknowledgment by the Parties.
3.17.6 Notices. All notices hereunder and communic ations regarding interpretation of the terms of the Contract or chan ges thereto shall be provided by the mailing thereof by registered or certified mail, return rec eipt requested, postage prepaid and addressed as follows:
C
ONTRACTOR :
Diede Construction Inc
12393 West 99 Frontage Road
P.O. Box 1007
Lodi, CA 95258
Attn: Stephan L. Diede
President
19 C
ITY :
City of Merced City of Merced
2525 “O” Street 678 West 18th Street
Merced, California 95340 Merced, California 95340
Attn: Mr. Richard Maddox, PE Attn: City Manager
Interim City Engineer
Any notice so given shall be considered received by the other Party three (3) days after deposit in the U.S. Mail as stated above and addressed to the Party at the above address. Actual notice shall be deemed adequate notice on the date actual notice occurred, regardless of the method of service.
3.17.7 Time of Essence. Time is of the essence in the performance of this Contract.
3.17.8 Assignment Forbidden. Contractor shall not, either voluntarily or by action of law, assign or transfer this Contract or any obl igation, right, title or interest assumed by Contractor herein without the prior written consent of City. If Contractor attempts an assignment or transfer of this Contract or any obligation, rig ht, title or interest herein, City may, at its opti on, terminate and revoke the Contract and shall thereupon be relieved from any and all obligations to Contractor or its assignee or transferee.
3.17.9 No Third Party Beneficiaries. There are no intended third party beneficiaries of any right or obligation assumed by the Parties.
3.17.10 Governing Laws; Venue. This Agreement shal l be interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of California. If any action is brought to interpret or enforce any term of this Agreement, the action shall be bro ught in a state or federal court situated in the County of Merced, State of California.
3.17.11 Counterparts. This Contract may be execute d in counterparts, each of which shall constitute an original.
3.17.12 Successors. The Parties do for themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns agree to th e full performance of all of the provisions contained in this Contract.
3.17.13 [Reserved]
3.17.14 Solicitation. Contractor maintains and war rants that it has not employed nor retained any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working solely for Contractor, to solicit or secure this Contract. Further, Contractor warrants that it has not paid nor has it agreed to pay any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working solely for Contractor, any fee, commission, percentage, br okerage fee, gift or other consideration contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of this Contract. For breach or violation of this warranty, City shall have the right to terminate this Contract without liability.
20 3.17.15 Conflict of Interest. Contractor maintains and warrants that it has not employed nor retained any company or person, ot her than a bona fide employee working solely for Contractor, to solicit or secure this Agreement. Further, Contractor warrants that it has not paid nor has it agreed to pay any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working solely for Contractor, any fee, commission, percentage, brokerage fee, gift or other consideration contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of this Agreement. For breach or violation of this warranty, City shall have the right to resc ind this Agreement without liability. For the term of this Contract, no official, officer or employee of City, during the term of his or her service with City, shall have any direct interest in this Contra ct, or obtain any present or anticipated material benefit arising therefrom. In addition, Contractor agrees to file, or to cause its employees or subcontractors to file, a Statement of Economic Int erest with the City’s Filing Officer as required under state law in the performance of the Work.
3.17.16 Certification of License.
3.17.16.1 Contractor certifies that as of the date of execution of this Contract, Contractor has a current contractor’s license of the classification indicated below under Contractor’s signature.
3.17.16.2 Contractors are required by law to be lic ensed and regulated by the Contractors’ State License Board which has j urisdiction to investigate complaints against contractors if a complaint regarding a patent act o r omission is filed within four (4) years of the date of the alleged violation. A complaint regarding a latent act or omission pertaining to structural defects must be filed within ten (10) years of the date of the alleged violation. Any questions concerning a contractor may be referred to the Registrar, Contractors’ State License Board, P.O.
Box 26000, Sacramento, California 95826.
3.17.17 Authority to Enter Contract. Each Party wa rrants that the individuals who have signed this Contract have the legal power, right and authority to make this Contract and bind each respective Party.
3.17.18 Entire Contract; Modification. This Cont ract contains the entire agreement of the Parties with respect to the subjec t matter hereof, and supersedes all prior negotiations, understandings or agreements. This C ontract may only be modified by a writing signed by both Parties.
3.17.19 Non-Waiver. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall be considered waived by either party, unless such waiver is specifically specified in writing.
3.17.20 City’s Right to Employ Other Contractors. City reserves right to employ other contractors in connection with this Project or other projects.
[S IGNATURES ON NEXT PAGE ]
21 ACCOUNT DATA:
Project No.: CP230052 – Stephen Leonard Building Rehabilitation
Project Account Number(s) / Amount:
By:
Finance Officer Verification
23 EXHIBIT “A” - SERVICES / SCHEDULE
The work to be performed includes, but is not limited to, demolition of a portion of the building as need, installing plumbing, flooring, drywall, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinklers, rough and finished carpentry, painting installation and other items need to complete the restoration of the building due to fire and vandalism damage.
Such other items or details, not mentioned above, that are required by the Drawings and Technical Specifications Plans, City of Merced Standard Specifications and Typical Details, and the Special Conditions shall be performed, placed, constructed, or installed.
The project is located 640 T Street, Merced, CA. Bids are required for the entire work described herein.
The work shall be Completed within 150 working days of Notice to Proceed.
ITEM
NO. ITEM
UNIT OF
MEASURE
ESTAMATED
QUANTITY ITEM TOTAL (IN FIGURES)
1 Permits, Bonds, Licenses
& Insurance LS 1 $ 293 ,518 .00
2 Public Convenience and
Safety LS 1 $ 15,981 .00
3 Main Switch Board LS 1 $ 36,058.00
4 Building Remodel LS 1 $ 1,1 70,163.00
Total Bid for Items 1 thru 4 $ 1,515,720
24 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
25 EXHIBIT “B” - DRAWINGS AND TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
SCOPE OF WORK
The Work to be performed is included in Exhibit B – Drawings and Technical Specifications. Such other items or details, not mentioned above (Exhibi t A), that are required by the drawings, and technical specifications, or the following special conditions (Exhibit C) shall be performed, placed, constructed or installed.
PERFORMANCE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, incidentals, and do all work described in the Plans and these Special Provisions.
COORDINATION/COOPERATION
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at (209) 3 85-6846 at least three (3) working days in advance of the tentative starting date.
The Contractor shall be responsible for contacting and coordinating with all utility companies, including the City, with regards to the location of existing underground facilities in the construction area. The Contractor shall call Underground Service Alert at (800) 642-2444, at least 2 working days before commencement of underground work for location of underground facilities.
Utility facilities damaged, temporarily disconnected, or relocated as a result of construction shall be repaired/reconnected as directed by the governing utility at the Contractor's expense.
Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of this section shall be considered as included in the price paid for the various contract items of work involved and no additional compensation will be made.
INSPECTION OF SITE
The Contractor shall inspect the work site and note all existing conditions before submitting a bid for this project. A site tour is scheduled immediately following the pre-bid/LBE meeting if requested.
DUST CONTROL
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to minimize dust during construction. A dust collect devices shall be made available if necessary for dust control.
Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of this section shall be considered as included in the price paid for the various contract items of work involved and no additional compensation will be made.
PERMITS, BONDS, LICENSES AND INSURANCE
The Contractor shall procure all permits, bonds, licenses and insurance, pay all charges and fees, and give all notices necessary and incidental to the prosecution of the work.
26 Payment for "Permits, Bonds, Licenses and Insurance," shall be at the contract lump sum price as set forth in the proposal, and shall include all fe es associated with permits, bonds, licenses, inspections, and all other fees necessary for the completion of this item.
PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY
The Contractor shall be responsible for all the pro visions of this item, including issuance of all notices necessary for prosecution of the work.
Construction Area Signs -- Construction area signs and traffic cones shall be furnished, installed, maintained, and removed when no longer required in accordance with the provisions in Section 12, "Temporary Traffic Control," of the State Specifications, and these Special Provisions. Specifically included in this item are all detour signage.
The Contractor shall notify the appropriate regiona l notification center for operators of subsurface installations at least two (2) working days, but not more than 14 calendar days, prior to commencing any excavation for construction area sign posts. The regional notification centers include, but not limited to the following:
Notification Center Telephone
Underground Service Alert (USA) 1-800-227-2600 (Northern California)
All excavations required to install construction area signs shall be performed by hand methods without the use of power equipment, except that pow er equipment may be used if it is determined that there were no utility facilities in the area of the proposed post holes.
Sign substrates for stationary mounted construction area signs may be fabricated from fiberglass reinforced plastic as specified under “Prequalified and Tested Signing and Delineation Materials” elsewhere in these Special Provisions.
Type IV reflective sheeting for sign panels for portable construction area signs shall conform to the requirements specified under “Prequalified and Testing Signing and Delineation Materials” elsewhere in these Special Provisions.
The term “construction area signs” shall also include temporary object markers required for the direction of public traffic through or around the work during construction. Object markers listed or designated on the plans as construction area signs shall be considered to be signs and shall be furnished, erected, maintained and removed by the Contractor in the same manner specified for construction area signs and the following:
Object markers shall be stationary mounted on wood or metal posts in accordance with the details shown on the plans and the requirements in Section 82, “Markers and Delineators,” of the Standard Specifications.
Marker panels for Type N, Type P and Type R object markers shall conform to the requirements for sign panels for stationary mounted signs.
Target plates for Type K and Type L object markers and posts, reflectors and hardware shall conform to the requirements in said Section 82, but need not be new.
When a street section is to be closed, it shall be solidly barricaded, and signs shall be posted at the closure points indicating “Street Closed.”
27 Full cost of providing and removing construction area signs shall be borne exclusively by the Contractor and shall be considered as included in the contract lump sum price for Item 10-1.07, “Public Convenience & Safety.”
Maintaining Traffic -- Attention is directed to Section 7-1.03, "Public Convenience," Section 7-
1.04, "Public Safety," and Section 12, "Temporary Traffic Control," of the State Specifications.
Nothing in these Special Provisions shall be constr ued as relieving the Contractor from its responsibility as provided in Section 7-1.04 of the State Specifications.
All traffic cones used for night lane closures shall have reflective cone sleeves as specified in the specifications. One (1) 12-foot wide traffic lane must be open at all times.
The second and third paragraphs of Section 12-3.10, “Traffic Cones,” of the State Standard Specifications are amended to read:
The type of reflective cone sleeve used shall be at the option of the Contractor. Only one type of reflective cone sleeve shall be used on the project.
Lane closures shall conform to the provisions in the section of these special provisions entitled “Traffic Control System for Lane Closure.”
Personal vehicles of the Contractor's employees sha ll not be parked on the traveled way or shoulders, including any section closed to public traffic.
The Contractor shall notify local authorities of its intent to begin work at least five (5) days before work is begun. The Contractor shall cooperate with local authorities relative to handling traffic through the area and shall make its own arrangement s relative to keeping the working area clear of parked vehicles.
The Contractor shall provide access to all business es and residences within the construction zone at all times throughout the project. When the work requires the closing of a business driveway or other entrance, the Contractor shall po st signs directing the public to the most convenient access to the business.
The Contractor shall provide access to all private driveways when construction is not actively in progress. Access to driveways fronting the construction area shall not be hindered or blocked for time periods greater than 4 hours without notifying the property owner or tenant in writing 24 hours prior to blockage.
The Contractor shall provide safe public access aro und the work site in accordance with the American Disabilities Act requirements during the work.
Whenever vehicles or equipment are parked on the shoulder within six feet of a traffic lane, the shoulder area shall be closed with fluorescent traffic cones or portable delineators placed on a taper in advance of the parked vehicles or equipment and along the edge of the pavement at 25-foot intervals to a point not less than 25 feet past the last vehicle or piece of equipment. A minimum of nine (9) cones or portable delineators s hall be used for the taper. A C23 (Road Work Ahead) or C24 (Shoulder Work Ahead) sign shall be mounted on a telescoping flag tree with flags. The flag tree shall be placed where directed by the Engineer.
28 When the Contractor’s operations create a condition hazardous to traffic or to the public, he shall furnish, erect and maintain, at his expense and without cost to the City, such fences, barricades, lights, signs and other devices as are necessary to prevent accidents or damage or injury to the public. The Contractor shall also furnish such flagmen, provided with the necessary equipment kept clean and in good condition by the Contractor at his expense, as may be necessary to give adequate warning to traffic or to the public that the roadwa y is under construction or of any dangerous conditions to be encountered. The flagmen shall perform their duties and their work of furnishing and placing such signs, lights, flags and other warning and safety devices as set forth in the current “Work Area Traffic Control Handbook” as published b y the Building News, Inc., Los Angeles, California.
Minor deviations from the requirements of this sect ion concerning hours of work which do not significantly change the cost of the work may be permitted upon the written request of the Contractor if, in the opinion of the Engineer, public traffic will be better served and the work expedited. Such deviations shall not be adopted until the Engineer has indicated its written approval. All other modifications will be made by contract change order.
Full cost of conforming to this section shall be considered as included in the contract lump sum price for “Public Convenience and Safety.”
Traffic Control System for Lane Closure -- A traffic control system shall be provided by t he Contractor and shall be in accordance with the provisions of Section 12, "Temporary Traffic Control," of the State Specifications, the provisions under " Maintaining Traffic" elsewhere in these Special Provisions.
The provisions in this section shall not relieve the Contractor from its responsibility to provide such additional devices, or take such measures as may be necessary, to comply with the provisions in Section 7-1.04, "Public Safety," of the State Standard Specifications.
Prior to any lane closures, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide 72-hour notice to the City and obtain City approval of the lane closure. Failure to notify the City in a timely manner is cause for the City to prevent the lane closure.
Whenever a lane closure is made, the Contractor shall close the lane by placing fluorescent traffic cones, portable cones, portable delineators, or other devices approved by the Engineer, along a taper and along the edge of the closed lane adjacent to public traffic. One telescoping flag tree with flags shall be placed at the beginning and at the end of the taper.
If any component in the traffic control system is d isplaced or ceases to operate or function as specified, from any cause, during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall immediately repair said component to its original condition or replace said component, and shall restore the component to its original location. Full cost of providing flaggers shall be borne exclusively by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan and approved by the City Engineer prior to commencing any work.
Protection of the Work -- To minimize traffic congestion during the resurfacing operation, the work shall be done in stages. Residents with driveways within the closed section shall be notified at least 24 hours in advance of closure via door hangers and signs within the limits of the project.
Barricades and signs and their cost of replacement, the cost of flagmen necessary for the protection of the work and the public and costs of notificatio n of affected residents will be considered as 29 included in the contract price paid for bid items shown in the proposal, and no separate payments shall be made.
Payment for "Public Convenience and Safety," shall be at the contract lump sum price as set forth in the proposal, and shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and all work necessary for the completion of this item.
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
Summary
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to comply with all of the requirements of the latest NPDES General Permit for "Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction and Land Disturbance Activities" (Order No. 2009-0009-DWQ, N PDES No. CAS000002) hereinafter called the "Permit" and standard industry practice.
This includes, but is not limited to, preparing pla ns and application, maps as well as all necessary reporting on the SWQCB's Storm Water Mult iple Application and Report Tracking System (SMARTS System). The Contractor, working with their certified Qualified Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) Developer (QSD), will determine what would be the best course of action to comply with the latest State NP DES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction and Land Di sturbance Activities Order No. 2009- 0009- DWQ. If the Contractor's QSD determines a SWPPP is the best course of action, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and their QSD to submit to Construction Management a completed SWPPP for review. Upon acceptance of the SWPPP document by Construction Management, the QSD shall prepare a Notice of Inten tion (NOI) application in the SWQCB's SMARTS System and upload all necessary documents and maps to be approved by the Legally Responsible Person (LRP). Until a written approval of the SWPPP has been obtained from the SWQCB, no construction activity shall commence on t he project site. Upon obtaining written approval of the SWPPP, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to implement the SWPPP.
Throughout the course of the project, the Contractor's Qualified SWPPP Practitioner (QSP) shall conduct periodic inspections, testing, any reportin g on the SMARTS System as well as coordinate with the QSD to update the SWPPP as necessary. At the conclusion of construction, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor an d his or her QSD/QSP to ensure Annual Report(s) have been prepared on the SMARTS System a s well as prepare the Notice of Termination (NOT) for City's approval. The Contract or shall keep a copy of the approved SWPPP, and amendments thereto, at the job site and in the general business office of the Contractor. In addition, the Contractor shall make available to Construction Management copies of all amendments to the SWPPP as prepared by the Contractor. The SWPPP shall be made available upon request of a representative of the F resno Metropolitan Flood Control District, Regional Water Quality Control Board, State Water R esources Control Board or U. S.
Environmental Protection Agency. Requests by the public shall be directed to the Engineer.
If the Contractor and/or his/her QSD determines that a SWPPP is not necessary, then it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a list of Best Management Practices (BMP) that are to be implemented during the Work to Construction Management. The Contractor shall implement the BMP in a timely manner and maintain throughout the duration of the project. The Contractor shall keep a copy of the BMP list and any modification to the list at the job site and in the general business office of the Contractor. In addition, the Contractor shall make available to the City copies of all modifications to the BMP list. The BMP list shall be made available upon request of a representative of the Fresno Metropolitan Flood Control District, Regional Water Quality Control Board, State Water Resources Control Board or U. S. Environmental Protection Agency. Requests by the public shall be directed to Construction Management. 30 Notice of violation and/or fines for any non-compli ance will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Manage work activities to reduce the discharge of p ollutants to surface waters, groundwater, or municipal separate storm sewer systems including work items shown in the Bid Item List for:
1. Prepare Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. SWPPP preparation includes obtaining SWPPP approval, amending the SWPPP, preparing a CSMP and a SAP, and monitoring and inspecting WPC practices at the job site.
2. Storm Water Annual Report. Storm Water Annual Re port preparation includes certifications, monitoring and inspection results, and obtaining Storm Water Annual Report acceptance.
3. Storm Water Sampling and Analysis Day. Storm Wat er Sampling and Analysis Day includes reporting of storm water quality per qualifying rain event. If specified for the risk level, the work includes preparation, collection, analysis, and reporting of storm water samples for turbidity, pH, and other constituents.
4. Rain Event Action Plan. If specified for the project risk level, REAP preparation includes preparing and submitting REAP forms and monitoring weather forecasts.
Do not start work until:
1. SWPPP is approved by the City.
2. SWPPP is uploaded onto the SMART System.
3. WDID is issued.
4. SWPPP review requirements have been fulfilled. I f the RWQCB requires time for SWPPP review, allow 30 days for the RWQCB to review the SWPPP as specified under "Submittals" of these special provisions.
This project is anticipated to be Risk Level 1.
Definitions and Abbreviations
active and inactive areas: (1) Active areas have soil disturbing work activities occurring at least once within 14 days, and (2) Inactive areas a re areas that have not been disturbed for at least 15 days.
BMPs: Best Management Practices are water pollution control practices. construction phase: Construction phases are (1) Highway Construction i ncluding work activities for building roads and structures, (2) P lant Establishment including maintenance on vegetation installed for final stabilization, and (3) Suspension where work activities are suspended and areas are inactive.
CSMP: Construction Site Monitoring Program.
NAL: Numeric Action Level.
NEL: Numeric Effluent Limit.
NPDES: National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System.
NOI: Notice of Intent.
Normal working hours: The hours you normally work on this project.
Preparation Manual: The Department's "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Water Pollution Control Program Preparation Manual."
QSD: Qualified SWPPP Developer.
QSP: Qualified SWPPP Practitioner.
Qualified rain event: A qualified rain event is a storm that produces at least 0.5 inch of precipitation with a 48 hour or greater period between storms. 31 REAP: Rain Event Action Plan.
RWQCB: Regional Water Quality Control Board.
SAP: Sampling and Analysis Plan.
SSC: Suspended Sediment Concentration.
SWRCB: State Water Resources Control Board. SWPPP: Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. WDID: Waste Discharge Identification Number. WPC: Water Pollution Control.
WPC Manager: Water Pollution Control Manager. The WPC Manager i mplements water pollution control work described in the SWPPP and o versees revisions and amendments to the SWPPP.
Submittals
Within 20 days after contract approval, start the following process for SWPPP approval:
1. Submit 3 copies of the SWPPP and allow 20 days for the Engineer's review. If revisions are required, the Engineer provides comments and sp ecifies the date that the review stopped.
2. Change and resubmit the SWPPP within 15 days of receipt of the Engineer's comments.
The Engineer's review resumes when the complete SWPPP is resubmitted.
3. When the Engineer approves the SWPPP, submit an electronic and 4 printed copies of the approved SWPPP.
4. If the RWQCB reviews the approved SWPPP, the Eng ineer submits one copy of the approved SWPPP to the RWQCB for their review and co mment. RWQCBs requiring time to review SWPPPs include:
5. If the Engineer requests changes to the SWPPP ba sed on RWQCB comments, amend the SWPPP within 10 days.
Submit:
1. Storm water training records including training dates and subjects for employees and subcontractors. Include dates and subjects for ongo ing training, including tailgate meetings.
2. Employee training records.
2.1. Within 5 days of SWPPP approval for existing employees
2.2. Within 5 days of training for new employees
2.3. At least 5 days before subcontractors start work for subcontractor's employees
Prepare a Storm Water Annual Report for the reporting period from July 1st to June 30th. For the prior reporting period, submit the report no later than July 15th if construction occurs from July 1st through June 30th or within 15 days after contract acceptance if construction ends before June 30th.
Submit the Storm Water Annual Report as follows:
1. Submit 2 copies of the Storm Water Annual Report an d allow 10 days for the Engineer's review. If revisions are required, the Engineer pro vides comments and specifies the date that the review stopped.
2. Change and resubmit the Storm Water Annual Report w ithin 5 days of receipt of the Engineer's comments. The Engineer's review resumes when the complete Storm Water Annual Report is resubmitted.
3. When the Engineer accepts the Storm Water Annual Re port, insert the WPC Manager's signed certification and the Engineer's signed certification.
32 Submit one electronic copy and 2 printed copies of the accepted Storm Water Annual Report.
Submit as required:
1. NAL Exceedance Reports
2. NEL Exceedance Reports
3. Visual Monitoring Reports
4. Inspection Reports
5. BMP Status Report
At least 5 days before operating any construction support facility, submit:
1. A plan showing the location and quantity of WPC practices associated with the construction support facility
2. A copy of the NOI approved by the RWQCB and the SWPPP approved by the RWQCB if you will be operating a batch plant or a crushing plant under the General Industrial Permit
Quality Control and Assurance Training
Provide storm water training for:
1. Project managers
2. Supervisory personnel
3. Employees involved with WPC work
Train all employees, including subcontractor's employees, in the following subjects:
1. WPC rules and regulations
2. Implementation and maintenance for:
2.1. Temporary Soil Stabilization
2.2. Temporary Sediment Control
2.3. Tracking Control
2.4. Wind Erosion Control
2.5. Material pollution prevention and control
2.6. Waste management
2.7. Non-storm water management
2.8. Identifying and handling hazardous substances
2.9. Potential dangers to humans and the environm ent from spills and leaks or exposure to toxic or hazardous substances
Employees must receive initial WPC training before working on the job site. Conduct weekly training meetings covering:
1. WPC BMP deficiencies and corrective actions
2. BMPs that are required for work activities durin g the week
3. Spill prevention and control
4. Material delivery, storage, use, and disposal
5. Waste management
6. Non-storm water management procedures
Training for personnel to collect water quality samples must include:
1. SAP review
2. Health and safety review
33 3. Sampling simulations
A Storm Water Information Handout has been prepared for this contract and is available as described in "Supplemental Project Information" of these special provisions.
If you operate construction support facilities, protect storm water systems or receiving waters from the discharge of potential pollutants by using WPC practices.
Construction support facilities include:
1. Staging areas
2. Storage yards for equipment and materials
3. Mobile operations
4. Batch plants for PCC and HMA
5. Crushing plants for rock and aggregate
6. Other facilities installed for your convenience such as haul roads
If you operate a batch plant to manufacture PCC, HM A, or other material; or a crushing plant to produce rock or aggregate; obtain coverage under the General Industrial General Permit. You must be covered under the General Industrial Permit for batch plants and crushing plants located:
1. Outside of the job site
2. Within the job site that serve one or more contracts
Discharges from manufacturing facilities such as batch plants must comply with the general waste discharge requirements for Order No. 97-03-DWQ, NPD ES General Permit No. CAS000001, issued by the SWRCB for "Discharge of Stormwater Associated with Industrial Activities Excluding Construction Activities." For the General Industrial Permit, go to:
http://www.waterboards.ca.gov/
You may obtain copies of the Preparation Manual from the Publication Distribution Unit. The mailing address for the Publication Distribution Unit is:
State of California
Department of Transportation
Publication Distribution Unit
1900 Royal Oaks Drive
Sacramento, California 95815
Telephone: (916) 445-3520
The Preparation Manual and other WPC references are available at the Department's "Construction Storm Water and Water Pollution Control" Web site. For the Web site, go to:
http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/construc/stormwater/stormwater1.htm
Water Pollution Control Manager
Assign one WPC Manager to implement the SWPPP. The WPC Manager must comply with the Permit qualifications for a QSP and a QSD. You may assign a different QSD to prepare the SWPPP.
The QSD must have the following qualifications:
34 1. Department approved storm water management training described in the Department's "Construction Storm Water and Water Pollution Control" web site
2. Registration or certification described in the Permit
The QSP must meet the qualifications of the QSD or have the following certifications:
1. Department approved storm water management training described in the Department's "Construction Storm Water and Water Pollution Control" web site
2. Certification described in the Permit
At the job site, the WPC Manager must:
1. Be responsible for WPC work
2. Be the primary contact for WPC work
3. Oversee the maintenance of WPC practices
4. Oversee and enforce hazardous waste management practices
5. Have the authority to mobilize crews to make immediate repairs to WPC practices
6. Ensure that all employees have current water pollution control training
7. Implement the approved SWPPP and amend the SWPPP when required
WPC Manager must oversee:
1. Inspections of WPC practices identified in the SWPPP
2. Inspections and reports for visual monitoring
3. Preparation and implementation of REAPs
4. Sampling and analysis
5. Preparation and submittal of:
5.1. NAL exceedance reports
5.2. NEL exceedance reports
5.3. SWPPP annual certification
5.4. Annual reports
5.5. BMP status reports
STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP)
General
SWPPP work includes preparing a SWPPP including a C SMP, obtaining SWPPP approval, amending the SWPPP, inspecting and reporting on WPC practices at the job site. The SWPPP must comply with the Preparation Manual and the Permit. The SWPPP must be submitted in place of the water pollution control program under Section 13-2, "Water Pollution Control Program," of the Standard Specifications.
Additional WPC work will be paid for as extra work under Section 4-1.05, "Changes and Extra Work," of the Standard Specifications.
The SWPPP must include sections as specified for the project risk level as follows:
1. For risk level 1:
1.1. Schedule
1.2. CSMP
35 2. For risk level 2:
2.1. Schedule
2.2. CSMP
2.3. Adherence to Effluent Standards for NALs
2.4. REAP
3. For risk level 3:
3.1. Schedule
3.2. CSMP
3.3. Adherence to Effluent Standards for NALs and NELs
3.4. REAP
The SWPPP must include WPC practices for:
1. Storm water and non-stormwater from areas outside o f the job site related to project work activities such as:
1.1. Staging areas
1.2. Storage yards
1.3. Access roads
2. Activities or mobile operations related to contractor obtained NPDES permits
3. Construction support facilities
The SWPPP must include a copy of permits obtained b y the Department such as Fish & Game permits, US Army Corps of Engineers permits, RWQCB 401 Certifications, and RWQCB Waste Discharge Requirements for Aerially Deposited Lead Reuse.
Amend the SWPPP annually and resubmit it by July 15th. Amend the SWPPP if:
1. Changes in work activities could affect the discharge of pollutants
2. WPC practices are added by change order work
3. WPC practices are added at your discretion
4. Changes in the amount of disturbed soil are substantial
5. Objectives for reducing or eliminating pollutants i n storm water discharges have not been achieved
6. There is a Permit violation
Whenever you amend the SWPPP, follow the same process specified for SWPPP approval.
Retain a printed copy of the approved SWPPP at the job site.
SWPPP Schedule
The SWPPP schedule must:
1. Describe when work activities will be performed tha t could cause the discharge of pollutants into storm water
2. Describe WPC practices associated with each construction phase
3. Identify soil stabilization and sediment control practices for disturbed soil areas
Construction Site Monitoring Program (CSMP)
General
36 The QSD must prepare a CSMP as part of the SWPPP. T he CSMP must be developed before starting work and be revised to reflect current construction activities as necessary.
The CSMP must include sections for the project risk level as follows:
1. For risk level 1:
1.1. Visual Monitoring
1.2. SAP for Non-Visible Pollutants
2. For risk level 2:
2.1. Visual Monitoring
2.2. SAP for Non-Visible Pollutants
2.3. SAP for sediment and turbidity
2.4. SAP for pH
3. For risk level 3:
3.1. Visual Monitoring
3.2. SAP for Non-Visible Pollutants
3.3. SAP for sediment and turbidity
3.4. SAP for pH
3.5. SAP for receiving waters
3.6. SAP for temporary active treatment systems
Visual Monitoring
The WPC Manager must oversee the performance of visual inspections for qualifying rain events.
For each qualifying rain event, perform visual inspections and record observations during normal working hours as follows:
1. Record the time, date, and rain gauge reading
2. Observe:
2.1. Within 2 days before the storm:
2.1.1 Drainage areas for spills, leaks, or uncontro lled pollutants
2.1.2 Proper implementation of WPC practices
2.1.3 Storm water storage areas for leaks and adequ ate freeboard
2.2. Every 24 hours during the storm:
2.2.1 WPC practices for effective operation
2.2.2 WPC practices needing maintenance and repair
2.3. Within 2 days after the storm event:
2.3.1. Discharge locations
2.3.2. WPC practices to evaluate the design, implem entation, and effectiveness
2.3.3. To identify where additional WPC practices m ay be needed.
Perform non-stormwater discharge visual inspections as follows:
1. At least once during each of the following periods:
1.1. January through March
1.2. April through June
1.3. July through September
1.4. October through December
37 2. Observe flowing and contained storm water for the p resence of floating and suspended materials, sheen on the surface, discoloration, tur bidity, odors, and sources of observed pollutants
3. Observe the job site for the presence of authorized and unauthorized non-stormwater discharges and their sources
The WPC Manager must prepare visual inspection reports that include the following:
1. Name of personnel performing the inspection, inspection date, and date inspection report completed
2. Storm and weather conditions
3. Locations and observations
4. Corrective actions taken
Maintain visual inspections reports at the job site as part of the SWPPP.
Sampling and Analysis Plan (SAP)
General
Include a SAP in the CSMP to monitor the effectiveness of WPC practices. The SAP must comply with the Preparation Manual.
Assign trained personnel to collect water quality s amples. Document their training in the SAP.
Describe the following water quality sampling procedures in the SAP:
1. Sampling equipment
2. Sample preparation
3. Collection
4. Field measurement methods
5. Analytical methods
6. Quality assurance and quality control
7. Sample preservation and labeling
8. Collection documentation
9. Sample shipping
10. Chain of custody
11. Data management and reporting
12. Precautions from the construction site health and safety plan
13. Laboratory selection and certifications
Whenever assigned field personnel take samples, com ply with the equipment manufacturer's recommendation for collection, analysis methods, and equipment calibration.
Samples taken for laboratory analysis must follow w ater quality sampling procedures and be analyzed by a State-certified laboratory under 40 C FR Part 136, "Guidelines Establishing Test Procedures for the Analysis of Pollutants."
The SAP must identify the State-certified laboratory, sample containers, preservation requirements, holding times, and analysis method. For a list of State-certified laboratories, go to:
http://www.cdph.ca.gov/certlic/labs/Pages/ELAP.aspx
38 Include procedure for sample collection during precipitation.
Retain water quality sampling documentation and analytical results with the SWPPP at the job site.
Show pollutant sampling locations on SWPPP drawings.
If discharges or sampling locations change because of changed work activities or knowledge of site conditions, amend the SAP.
If the project is risk level 2 or risk level 3, include procedures for collecting and analyzing at least 3 samples for each day of each qualifying rain event. Describe the collection of effluent samples at all locations where the storm water is discharged off-site.
Analytical Results and Evaluation
Submit an electronic copy (in file format .xls, .txt, .csv, .dbs, or .mdb) and a printed copy of water quality analytical results, and quality assurance and quality control within 48 hours of field analysis sampling, and within 30 days for laboratory analysi s. Also provide an evaluation of whether the downstream samples show levels of the tested parameter that are higher than the control sample.
Electronic water quality analysis results must have the following information:
1. Sample identification number
2. Contract number
3. Constituent
4. Reported value
5. Analytical method
6. Method detection limit
7. Reported limit
SAP for Non-Visible Pollutants
The SAP must include a description of the sampling and analysis strategy for monitoring non- visible pollutants.
The SAP must identify potential non-visible pollutants present at the job site associated with any of the following:
1. Construction materials and waste
2. Existing contamination due to historical site usage
3. Application of soil amendments, including soil stabilization materials, with the potential to change pH or contribute toxic pollutants to storm water
SWPPP drawings must show the locations planned for storage and use of potential non-visible pollutants.
The SAP must include sampling procedures for the fo llowing conditions when observed during a storm water visual inspection. For each of the foll owing, collect at least one sample for each qualifying storm event:
1. Materials or waste containing potential non-visible pollutants that are not stored under watertight conditions
2. Materials or waste containing potential non-visible pollutants that are stored under watertight conditions, but a breach, leakage, malfunction, or spill is observed; the leak 39 or spill has not been cleaned up before precipitati on; and material or waste could discharge non-visible pollutants to surface waters or drainage system
3. Chemical applications, including fertilizer, pestic ide, herbicide, methyl methacrylate concrete sealant, or non-pigmented curing compound used during precipitation or within 24 hours preceding precipitation, and could dischar ge pollutants to surface waters or drainage system
4. Applied soil amendments, including soil stabilizati on materials that could change pH levels or contribute toxic pollutants to storm wate r runoff and discharge pollutants to surface waters or drainage system, unless available independent test data indicates acceptable concentrations of non-visible pollutants in the soil amendment
5. Storm water runoff from an area contaminated by historical usage of the site that could discharge pollutants to surface waters or drainage systems
The SAP must provide sampling procedures and schedule for:
1. Sample collection during the first 2 hours of ea ch rain event that generate runoff
2. Sample collection during normal working hours
3. Each non-visible pollutant source
4. Uncontaminated control sample
The SAP must identify locations for sampling downst ream and control samples, and reasons for selecting those locations. Select control sample locations where the sample will not come in contact with materials, waste, or areas associated with pot ential non-visible pollutants or disturbed soil areas.
SAP for Sediment and Turbidity
If the project is risk level 2 or risk level 3, sample and analyze for turbidity:
Parameter Test Method Detection Limit
(Min)
Unit
Turbidity Field test with calibrated
portable instrument
1 NTU
If the project is risk level 3 and the turbidity NEL has been exceeded, sample and analyze for SSC:
Parameter Test Method Detection Limit
(Min)
Unit
SSC ASTM Method D3977-97 5 Mg/L
SAP for pH
If the project is risk level 2 or risk level 3, sample and analyze for pH:
Parameter Test Method Detection Limit
(Min)
Unit
40 pH Field test with calibrated
portable instrument
0.2 pH units
SAP for Receiving Waters
If the project is risk level 3, describe procedures for obtaining samples from representative and accessible locations:
1. Upstream of the discharge point
2. Downstream of the discharge point
Show receiving water sampling locations on SWPPP drawings.
If there are several discharge points, describe pro cedures for obtaining samples from a single upstream and a single downstream location.
Rain Event Action Plan (REAP)
REAP work includes preparing and submitting REAP forms and monitoring weather forecasts. The WPC Manager must submit a REAP to protect the job site at least 48 hours before a predicted rain event.
Prepare a REAP when the National Weather Service is predicting at least a 50 percent probability of precipitation within 72 hours.
For the REAP, use approved forms and include:
1. Site location
2. Risk level
3. Contact information including 24-hour emergency phone numbers for:
3.1. WPC Manager
3.2. Erosion and sediment control providers or subcontractors
3.3. Storm water sampling providers or subcontractors
4. Storm Information
5. Construction phase information for:
5.1. Highway Construction including active and inactive areas for work activities for building roads and structures
5.2. Plant Establishment including maintenance on vegeta tion installed for final stabilization where areas are inactive
5.3. Suspension where work activities are suspended and areas are inactive
6. Construction phase information including:
6.1. Construction activities
6.2. Subcontractors and trades on the job site
6.3. Pre-storm activities including:
6.3.1. Responsibilities of the WPC Manager
6.3.2. Responsibilities of the crew and crew size
6.3.3. Stabilization for active and inactive disturbed soil areas
6.3.4. Stockpile management
6.3.5. Corrective actions taken for deficiencies identified during pre-storm visual inspection
41 6.4. Activities to be performed during storm events including:
6.4.1. Responsibilities of the WPC Manager
6.4.2. Responsibilities of the crew and crew size
6.4.3. BMP maintenance and repair
6.5. Description of flood contingency measures
You must have the REAP onsite at least 24 hours before a predicted rain event. A printed copy of each REAP must be at the job site as part of the SWPPP
Implement the REAP including mobilizing crews to complete activities no later than 24 hours before precipitation occurs.
IMPLEMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
SWPPP Implementation
Obtain, install, and maintain a rain gauge at the job site. Observe and record daily precipitation.
Monitor the National Weather Service Forecast Office on a daily basis. For forecasts, go to:
http://www.srh.noaa.gov/forecast
Whenever you or the Engineer identifies a deficienc y in the implementation of the approved SWPPP:
1. Correct the deficiency immediately, unless the E ngineer agrees to a later date for making the correction
2. Correct the deficiency before precipitation occu rs
If you fail to correct the deficiency by the agreed date or before the onset of precipitation, the Department may correct the deficiency and deduct th e cost of correcting the deficiency from payment.
Continue SWPPP implementation during any temporary suspension of work activities.
Install WPC practices within 15 days or before predicted precipitation, whichever occurs first.
Numeric Action Levels (NALs)
If the project is risk level 2 or risk level 3, then it is subject to NALs:
Parameter Test Method Detection
Limit (Min)
Unit Numeric Action Limit
pH Field test calibrated
with portable
instrument
0.2 pH units Lower NAL = 6.5 Upper
NAL = 8.5
Turbidity Field test calibrated
with portable
instrument
1 NTU 250 NTU
Numeric Effluent Limits (NELs)
42 If the project is risk level 3, then it is subject to NELs:
Parameter Test Method Detection
Limit (Min)
Unit Numeric Effluent Limit
pH Field test calibrated
with portable
instrument
0.2 pH units Lower NEL = 6.0 Upper
NEL = 9.0
Turbidity Field test calibrated
with portable
instrument
1 NTU 500 NTU
The storm event daily average for storms up to the 5-year, 24-hour storm, must not exceed the NEL for turbidity.
The daily average sampling results must not exceed the NEL for pH.
Storm Water Sampling and Analysis Day
Storm Water Sampling and Analysis Day work includes preparation, collection, analysis, and reporting of storm water samples for turbidity, pH, and other constituents. If the project is risk level 2 or risk level 3, and there is a qualified rain ev ent that produces runoff, comply with the project's SAP for preparation, collection, analysis, and reporting of storm water samples. Collect:
1. Samples for each non-visible pollutant source an d a corresponding uncontaminated control sample
2. Samples for turbidity, pH, and other constituent s as specified
3. At least 3 samples for each day of each qualifyi ng rain event
4. Samples for all locations where the storm water is discharged off-site
Perform sample collection during:
1. First 2 hours of each qualified rain event that produces runoff
2. Normal working hours
If the project is risk level 3, obtain receiving water samples.
You are not required to physically collect samples during dangerous weather conditions such as flooding or electrical storms.
If downstream samples show increased levels, assess WPC practices, site conditions, and surrounding influences to determine the probable cause for the increase.
Inspection
The WPC Manager must oversee inspections for WPC practices identified in the SWPPP:
1. Before a forecasted storm
2. After precipitation that causes site runoff
3. At 24-hour intervals during extended precipitati on
4. On a predetermined schedule, a minimum of once a week
The WPC Manager must oversee daily inspections of:
43 1. Storage areas for hazardous materials and waste
2. Hazardous waste disposal and transporting activi ties
3. Hazardous material delivery and storage activiti es
4. WPC practices specified under "Construction Site Management" of these special provisions
The WPC Manager must use the Storm Water Site Inspection Report provided in the Preparation Manual.
The WPC Manager must prepare BMP status reports that include the following:
1. Location and quantity of installed WPC practices
2. Location and quantity of disturbed soil for the active or inactive areas
Within 24 hours of finishing the weekly inspection, the WPC Manager must submit:
1. Copy of the completed site inspection report
2. Copy of the BMP status report
REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
Storm Water Annual Report
Storm Water Annual Report work includes certificati ons, monitoring and inspection results, and obtaining Storm Water Annual Report acceptance. The WPC Manager must prepare a Storm Water Annual Report. The report must:
1. Use an approved report format
2. Include project information including description and location
3. Include storm water monitoring information including:
3.1. Summary and evaluation of sampling and analysis res ults including laboratory reports
3.2. Analytical methods, reporting units, detections limits for analytical parameters
3.3. Summary of corrective actions
3.4. Identification of corrective actions or compliance activities that were not implemented
3.5. Summary of violations
3.6. Names of individuals performing storm water inspections and sampling
3.7. Logistical information for inspections and sampling including location, date, time, and precipitation
3.8. Visual observations and sample collection records
4. Include documentation on training for:
4.1. Individuals responsible for NPDES permit compliance
4.2. Individuals responsible for BMP installation, inspection, maintenance, and repair
4.3. Individuals responsible for preparing, revising, and amending the SWPPP NAL Exceedance Report
If the project is risk level 2 or risk level 3 and an effluent sample exceeds a NAL, notify the Engineer and submit a NAL Exceedance Report no later than 48 hours after the conclusion of the storm event. The report must:
1. Include the following field sampling results and inspections:
1.1. Analytical methods, reporting units, and detection limits 44 1.2. Date, location, time of sampling, visual observation and measurements
1.3. Quantity of precipitation of the storm event
2. Description of BMPs and corrective actions taken to manage NAL exceedance
NEL Violation Report
If the project is risk level 3 and an NEL is exceeded, notify the Engineer and submit a NEL Violation Report within 6 hours. The report must:
1. Include the following field sampling results and inspections:
1.1. Analytical methods, reporting units, and detection limits
1.2. Date, location, time of sampling, visual observations and measurements
1.3. Quantity of precipitation of the storm event
2. Description of BMPs and corrective actions taken to manage NEL exceedance
If the project is risk level 2 or risk level 3, submit all sampling results to the Engineer no later than 48 hours after the conclusion of a storm event.
PAYMENT
Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of this section shall be considered as included in the price paid for the various contract items of work involved and no additional compensation will be made.
The contract lump sum price paid for prepare storm water pollution prevention plan includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in preparing, obtaining approval of, and amending the SWPPP and CSMP, inspecting water pollution control practices, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.
The City does not adjust payment for an increase or decrease in the quantity of storm water sampling and analysis day.
You may request or the Engineer may order laboratory analysis of storm water samples. Laboratory analysis of storm water samples will be paid for as extra work under Section 4- 1.05D, "Extra Work," of the State Standard Specifications.
The City does not pay for the preparation, collecti on, laboratory analysis, and reporting of storm water samples for non-visible pollutants if WPC practices are not implemented before precipitation or if a failure of a WPC practice is not corrected before precipitation.
The City does not pay for implementation of WPC practices in areas outside the highway right- of- way not specifically provided for in the plans or in the special provisions.
The City does not pay for WPC practices installed at your construction support facilities.
WPC practices for which there are separate bid items of work are measured and paid for as those bid items of work.
45 STREET SWEEPING
This work includes street sweeping.
The SWPPP must describe and include the use of street sweeping as a water pollution control practice for sediment control and tracking control.
Submittals
At least 5 business days before starting clearing and grubbing, earthwork, or other activities with the potential for tracking sediment or debris, submit:
1. Number of sweepers described in the SWPPP
2. Type of sweeper technology
Quality Control and Assurance
Retain and submit records of street sweeping including:
1. Quantity of sweeping waste disposal
2. Sweeping times and locations
CONSTRUCTION
Street Sweepers
Sweepers must use one of these technologies:
1. Mechanical sweeper followed by a vacuum-assisted sweeper
2. Vacuum-assisted dry (waterless) sweeper
3. Regenerative-air sweeper
Operation
Street sweeping must be done at:
1. Paved roads at job site entrance and exit locati ons
2. Paved areas within the job site that flow to sto rm drains or water bodies
Street sweeping must be done:
1. During clearing and grubbing activities
2. During earthwork activities
3. During trenching activities
4. During roadway structural section activities
5. When vehicles are entering and leaving the job s ite
6. After soil disturbing activities
7. After observing offsite tracking of material
Monitor paved areas and roadway within the jobsite. Street sweeping must be done:
1. Within 1 hour, if sediment or debris is observed during activities that require sweeping
2. Within 24 hours, if sediment or debris is observ ed during activities that do not require sweeping
46 At least 1 sweeper must be on the job site at all times when sweeping work is required. The sweeper must be in good working order.
Perform street sweeping to minimize dust. If dust generation is excessive or sediment pickup is ineffective, use water or a vacuum.
You may stockpile collected material on the jobsite according to the approved SWPPP. Dispose of collected material at least once per week.
Material collected during street sweeping must be removed and disposed of under Section 7-1.13, "Disposal of Material Outside the Street Right of Way," of the Standard Specifications.
Your WPCM must inspect paved roads at job site access points:
1. Daily if earthwork and other sediment or debris generating activities occur daily
2. Weekly if earthwork and other sediment or debris generating activities do not occur daily
3. When the National Weather Service predicts preci pitation with a probability of at least 30 percent
Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of this section shall be considered as included in the price paid for the various contract items of work involved and no additional compensation will be made.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Record Drawings shall be submitted before the notice of completion is filed and must include the following:
• Shall be submitted on Mylar, at least 24”x 36”, and shall bear the name, address, telephone number of the firm preparing the drawings and in electronic (AutoCAD) format. • Surveyor’s/Engineers statement (with embossed or wet seal and with and original signature on each sheet) shall verify the as-built drawings reflect the true conditions in the field. • Contractor’s statement (with original signature on each sheet) shall verify all construction specifications and product qualities have been met or exceeded. • “AS-BUILT DRAWINGS” or “RECORD DRAWINGS” shall be clearly labeled on each sheet. • The location and elevation of the benchmark referenced will be shown on the drawing. • Corrected placement, grade, elevation and alignment of roads, water system, sewer and storm system, lighting system and appurtenances, pipe sizes, material changes, shall all be shown on as-built drawing.
• All horizontal distances shall be shown to the near est tenth of a foot (0.1’). All elevations shall be shown to the nearest five hundredths of a foot (0.05’).
Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of this section shall be considered as included in the price paid for the various contract items of work involved and no additional compensation will be made.
47 48
49 50
51 52
53 54
55 56
57 58
59 60
61 62
63 64
65 66
67 68
69 70
71 72
73 74
75 76
77 78
79 80
81 82
83 84
85 86
87 88
89 90
91 92
93 94
95 96
97 PROJECT MANUAL
98 22-12479 SEALS PAGE 000107 - 1 of 2
SECTION 000107
SEALS PAGE
_________________________________
Architect
James E. Hickman, Jr.
Teter, LLP
7535 North Palm Ave., Suite 201
Fresno, California 93711
Phone: (559) 437-0887
Fax: (559) 438-7554
_________________________________
Mechanical
Steven Jones
Teter, LLP
7535 North Palm Ave., Suite 201
Fresno, California 93711
Phone: (559) 437-0887
Fax: (559) 438-7554
_________________________________
Electrical
Bryan Glass
Teter, LLP
7535 North Palm Ave., Suite 201
Fresno, California 93711
Phone: (559) 437-0887
Fax: (559) 438-7554
_________________________________
Structural Engineer
Michael Showerman
Axiom Structural Design, Inc.
167 S Thor Street
Turlock, California 95380
Phone: (209) 604-2898
99 22-12479 SEALS PAGE 000107 - 2 of 2
_________________________________
Fire Sprinkler
Dario Moran
Nexus Engineering
1400 Lone Palm Ave., Ste. A
Modesto, CA 95351
Phone: (209) 572-7399
_________________________________
Civil
Nathan Bray
Northstar Engineering Group, Inc.
620 12th Street
Modesto, CA 95354
Phone: (209) 524-3525
_______
Fire Spri
Dario Mo
Nexus E
1400 Lo
Modesto
Phone: (
_______
Civil
Nathan B
Northsta
620 12th
Modesto
100
22-12479 - Ph 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 – 1 of 4
SECTION 000110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION PAGES
000101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE................................ ................................ ......................... 1 000107 SEALS PAGE ................................ ................................ ................................ ........ 1 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................ ................................ ......................... 4 DIVISION 00 CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS PAGES
CITY OF MERCED BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS ................................ ...... 90 DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGES
011100 SUMMARY OF WORK ................................ ................................ .......................... 4 011103 ADDENDA ................................ ................................ ................................ ............. 1 011105 USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES ................................ ...................... 3 012300 ALTERNATES ................................ ................................ ................................ ....... 2 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ................................ ................................ ........... 6 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ................................ ...................... 4 012613 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) ................................ ................................ .. 4 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES ................................ ................................ ................... 5 013113 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ................................ ............... 3 013119 PROJECT MEETINGS ................................ ................................ .......................... 5 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ................................ ............. 7 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ................................ ................................ .. 2 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ................................ ................................ ................. 9 014000 QUALITYAND TESTING REQUIREMENTS ................................ .......................... 8 014200 REFERENCES ................................ ................................ ................................ ...... 4 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ................................ ....................... 8 015116 FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................ ........................... 6 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS................................ ................................ ................ 5 017300 EXECUTION ................................ ................................ ................................ .......... 7 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL ............................... 6 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ................................ ................................ ................. 4 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ................................ ............................ 9 017836 WARRANTIES ................................ ................................ ................................ ....... 3 017839 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS ................................ ................................ ......... 4 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING ................................ ................................ ..... 4 018113 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, CGBSC ................................ ............ 5 DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS PAGES
024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ................................ ................................ .................... 6
101
22-12479 - Ph 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 – 2 of 4
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE PAGES
033543 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING ................................ ................................ ..... 10 DIVISION 04 MASONRY PAGES
(NOT USED)
DIVISION 05 METALS PAGES
(NOT USED)
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS PAGES
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY ................................ ................................ .......................... 8 061600 PLYWOOD PANEL SHEATHING ................................ ................................ .......... 2 066400 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING ................................ ............. 4 DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PAGES
072116 BLANKET INSULATION ................................ ................................ ........................ 5 074113 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS ................................ .......................... 13 075416 SINGLE PLY ROOFING ................................ ................................ ........................ 13 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ................................ ................................ . 9 079200 JOINT SEALANTS ................................ ................................ ................................ . 9 DIVISION 08 OPENINGS PAGES
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ................................ ............................ 9 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ................................ ................................ .......... 5 087100 DOOR HARDWARE ................................ ................................ .............................. 15 088000 GLAZING ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 12 DIVISION 09 FINISHES PAGES
092900 GYPSUM BOARD................................ ................................ ................................ .. 8 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ................................ ................................ .......... 9 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES ................................ ............................... 5 099100 PAINTING ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 17 DIVISION 10 SPECIALITES PAGES
101400 SIGNAGE ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 10 102800 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES ................................ ................................ ............ 5 104116 EMERGENCY KEY CABINETS (KNOX BOX) ................................ ....................... 2 104415 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS ................................ ............................. 3
102
22-12479 - Ph 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 – 3 of 4
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT PAGES
(NOT USED)
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS PAGES
(NOT USED)
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PAGES
(NOT USED)
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT PAGES
(NOT USED)
DIVISIONS 15 - 20 PAGES
(NOT USED/RESERVED)
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION PAGES
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM ................................ ............................. Refer to Plans DIVISION 22 PLUMBING PAGES
220000 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS ................................ ................................ ... 10 220050 PLUMBING ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 12 DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGES 230100 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS ................................ .............................. 15 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC ................................ ............................. 8 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTS ............... 8 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ................................ .... 4 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ................................ ....... 9 230700 HVAC INSULATION ................................ ................................ .............................. 17 233113 METAL DUCTS ................................ ................................ ................................ ..... 14 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ................................ ................................ ................... 9 233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS ................................ ................................ ............. 4 233723 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS………………………………………………………. 5 235400 FURNACES……………………………………………………………………………….. 9
237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS .............. 10 DIVISION 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION PAGES
(NOT USED)
103
22-12479 - Ph 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 – 4 of 4
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL PAGES
260000 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK ................................ ................................ .... 6 260100 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK ................................ ........... 11 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ................................ ............. 28 260526 GROUNDING ................................ ................................ ................................ ........ 7 262413 SWITCHBOARDS………………………………………………………………………… 7
262416 PANELBOARDS…………………………………………………………………………... 5
265113 LIGHTING ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 10 266100 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS ................................ ................................ .......... 13 269500 ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS ................................ ................................ ... 18 DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS PAGES
270200 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM ................................ ................................ ....... 5 DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PAGES
283100 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ................................ ................................ .......................... 9 DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK PAGES
311100 SITE CLEARING…………………………………………………………………………. 6
312000 EARTHWORK……………………………………………………………………………. 9
312333 TRENCHING ................................ ................................ ................................ ......... 6 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS PAGES
321216 ASPHALT PAVING………………………………………………………………………. 7
321218 ASPHALT PAVING SEALING………………………………………………………….. 3 321313 CONCRETE PAVING AND WALKS ................................ ................................ ...... 12 321373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS……………………………………………... 5 321700 PAVING SPECIALTIES…………………………………………………………………... 7 DIVISION 33 UTILITIES PAGES
331000 WATER DISTRIBUTION…………………………………………………………………. 6
END OF SECTION
104
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUMMARY OF WORK 011100 - 1 of 4
SECTION 011100
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Access to site.
4. Work restrictions.
5. Specification and drawing conventions.
B. Related Sections:
1. Owner’s Division 00 Sections including but not limited to the following:
a. Instructions to Bidders.
b. Bid Forms.
c. Construction Contract Agreement.
d. General Conditions of the Contract.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification:
Stephen Leonard Park Community Building Rehabilitation
Phase 2 Renovation – Fire Damage Refurbishment
640 T Street
Merced, CA 95341
Owner’s Project Number: CP230052
Architect’s Project Number: 22-12479.02
105
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUMMARY OF WORK 011100 - 2 of 4
B. Owner:
City of Merced
2525 “O” Street
Merced, CA 95340
Telephone: 209-600-2187
Contact: Michael Wegley, PE, City Engineer
C. Architect:
TETER, LLP
7535 North Palm Avenue, Suite 201
Fresno, California 93711
Telephone 559.437.0887
Contact: Robert Dinuzzo, AIA
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Phase 2 Work is comprised of non-structural alterations for fire damage reconstruction of the Stephen Leonard Community Park Building as described in the Drawings and Specifications.
a. Work of Phase 2 includes but is not limited to the following:
1) Payment for any Local, City, or County applications, permits, fees, etc. as required to complete the work.
2) Interior finishes.
3) Roofing.
4) Plumbing fixtures.
5) Mechanical Equipment and distribution.
6) Electrical power and lighting.
7) Fire sprinklers.
b. Primary selective demolition and structural restoration work has been completed as part of Phase 1.
B. Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under single prime contract.
1.5 ACCESS TO SITE
A. Restricted Use of Site: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
106
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUMMARY OF WORK 011100 - 3 of 4
B. Limits on Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period.
Repair damage caused by construction operations.
D. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets, work on public streets, rights of way, and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Submit a written request to the Architect for work hours outside of the indicted on-site hours; request subject to review by the Owner.
C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1. Notify Architect, and Owner not less than 2 days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.
2. Obtain Architect’s, and Owner’s written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.
107
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUMMARY OF WORK 011100 - 4 of 4
1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. General: Specifications establish minimum quality standards for products, materials, and installation requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the Drawings; Drawings establish material and product location and quantity.
1. Where requirements for materials and/or products indicated on the Drawings are not specified, provide heavy duty commercial grade products and materials.
B. Division 00 Contracting Requirements: General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to all Sections of the Specifications.
C. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
D. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements shall be complied with by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
E. Drawing and Specification Coordination : Materials and products are identified on Drawings by typical generic terms and are described in detail in the Specifications unless materials and products are described in detail on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION - (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
108
22-12479 – Ph 2 ADDENDA 011103 - 1 of 1
SECTION 011103
ADDENDA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative requirements for Addenda issued prior to bid opening.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 00 Sections as applicable to contract requirements and modifications.
2. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
3. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for changes to the Contract Documents after award of the Contract.
1.3 NOTICE TO BIDDERS
A. Addenda will be issued to registered plan holders for changes to the drawings and specifications during the bidding period prior to the bid opening. Addenda shall serve to clarify, revise, and supersede information in the Project Manual, Drawings, and previously issued Addenda. Portions of the Addenda affecting the Contract Documents will be incorporated into the Contract by enumeration of the Addendum in the Owner/Contractor Agreement.
B. The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the appropriate space on the Bid Form.
1.4 GOVERNING AGENCY REVIEW AND APPROVAL
A. Addenda shall be submitted to the Authority having Jurisdiction (AHJ) by the project Architect and shall be approved by the AHJ in order to be officially incorporated into the construction documents. All addenda must be signed by the architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
109
22-12479 Ph 2 USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES 011105 - 1 of 3 SECTION 011105
USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Administrative and procedural requirements for use of Architect’s electronic Contract Document drawing files.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”
2. Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”
3. Division 01 Section “Project Record Drawings.”
1.3 USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES
A. Architect may make available to Contractor digital data files of Architect’s Drawings for use in preparing shop drawings, coordination drawings, and project record drawings.
1. Electronic files will be available without charge.
2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings.
3. Files will be supplied digitally via email or FTP site and will be in PDF, DWG, or similar common format.
4. Waiver of Liability: Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers of this Project shall each execute a waiver of liability for each use of the Architects electronic files. a. Waiver of Liability form shall be submitted to the Architect at the time or request for use of Architect’s electronic data files.
b. Waiver of Liability form shall be the “ELECTRONIC DATA FILE DISTRIBUTION WAIVER OF LIABILITY FORM” included at the end of this Specification Section.
c. The use of the electronic files shall only be used for this Project and for the identified purposes noted in the Waiver of Liability form. 1) Each entity shall be responsible for complying with the restrictions of the Liability Waiver form.
2) Electronic Contract Document drawing files received from the architect shall not be duplicated without written permission of the Architect.
110
22-12479 Ph 2 USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES 011105 - 2 of 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
(Electronic Data File Distribution Waiver of Liability included on the following page) 111
22-12479 Ph 2 USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES 011105 - 3 of 3
ELECTRONIC DATA FILE DISTRIBUTION WAIVER OF LIABILITY
TETER, LLP
7535 North Palm, Suite 201
Fresno, California 93711
Project: _____________________________________________________________________________ Intended Use: ________________________________________________________________________ Any electronic data, files or information provided under this Agreement are the property of the above listed Professionals and consultants (Team). It is understood and agreed that the information contained in these electronic data file shall not be copied or duplicated for any use other than the project for which they were created. It is understood by the undersigned that compatibility of this electronic media with other systems is not guaranteed, and conversion to other systems is done at the user’s own risk.
The user hereby agrees and recognizes that designs, plans and data stored on electronic media including, but not limited to, computer disk and magnetic tape, may be subject to undetectable alteration and/or uncontrollable deterioration. It is agreed by the undersigned that the Team shall not be liable for the completeness or accuracy of any material provided on electronic media.
The undersigned agrees to defend, hold harmless and indemnify the Team and its officers, directors, employees, agents and consultants for any and all claims, losses, costs or damage whatsoever arising out of, resulting from, or in any way related to the use of electronic data files provided hereunder, whether that use is authorized or unauthorized. The user further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Team its officers, directors, employees, agents and consultants from any and all claims, damages, losses, expenses and injuries arising out of the modification of the electronic data files by the user or by anyone obtaining said files through or from the user.
The Team bears no responsibility for the information in the electronic data files once it leaves the offices of TETER, LLP. The undersigned understands that the electronic data files are subject to applicable copyright laws of the United States and agrees to be bound by same. Upon our receipt of this agreement duly executed by an Officer of your firm you may request the Data files.
Name (Print/Sign): ________________________________________________ Date: _____________ Firm: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________ Phone and email: _________________________________________________ ___________________ Name (Print/Sign): ________________________________________________ Date: _____________ Firm: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________ Phone and email: _________________________________________________ ___________________ Name (Print/Sign): ________________________________________________ Date: _____________ Firm: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________ Phone and email: _________________________________________________ ___________________ 112
22-12479 – Ph 2 ALTERNATES 012300 - 1 of 2
SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1. Where conflicts occur between this Section and Division 00 contract requirements regarding alternates, the most restrictive requirements shall apply.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding r equirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding cha nge either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.
2. The cost or cr edit for eac h alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Wo rk. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, acces sory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each al ternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a co mplete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. 113
22-12479 – Ph 2 ALTERNATES 012300 - 2 of 2
D. Schedule of Alternates: A schedule of alternates is included in Part 3 Article “Schedule of Alternates” at the end of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Replace Coiling Door Motor
1. Base Bid: Everything included in the plans and specifications.
2. Alternate: Provide additive dollar amount to replace the overhead coiling door motor operator.
END OF SECTION
114
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 of 6 SECTION 012500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1. Where conflicts occur between this Section and Division 00 contract requirements regarding substitution procedures, the most restrictive requirements shall apply.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 00 Section “Instructions to Bidders” and other Division 00 Sections as applicable to substitution requests.
2. Division 01 Section “Contract Modification Procedures” for changes to the approved/ permitted Construction Documents.”
3. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for substitutions.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to the Owner.
115
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 of 6
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit documentation identifying product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title, and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at the end of this Section.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution 116
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 of 6 within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Architect will not act on any Post-Bid Substitutions until 7 days following the submission of the Schedule of Values per Division 01 Section “Payment Procedures.”
a. Forms of Acceptance:
1) Substitutions Prior to Bid: Addenda will be issued for substitutions accepted prior to bid.
2) Substitutions After Award of Contract: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions Prior to Bid: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 21 days prior to the submission of bids. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider bidder’s request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied.
a. Substitutions prior to bid shall also be subject to the requirements of applicable Division 00 Specification Sections.
b. Substitutions prior to bid shall comply with the requirements for Substitutions for Cause or Substitutions for Convenience as applicable.
2. Substitutions requested by bidders during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents.
117
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 4 of 6 B. Substitutions After Award of Contract: The Contractor after award of the Contract, as allowed by the General Conditions, may submit materials and methods to be considered for substitutions.
1. The following are not considered to be substitutions:
a. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. b. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents.
c. The Contractor’s compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities.
C. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.
b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
D. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation 118
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 5 of 6 services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.
d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
(Substitution Request Form included on the following page) 119
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 6 of 6
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
FOR: (Project Title)
We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project:
SECTION PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM
________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________ Proposed Substitution: _______________________________________________________________________________________ Attach complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable.
Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proposed installation.
Fill in the blanks below:
A. Does the substitution affect dimension on Drawings:
__________________________________________________________________________________________________ B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________ C. What affect does substitution have on other trades?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________ D. Difference between proposed substitution and specified item? __________________________________________________________________________________________________ E. Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are:
________ Same ________ Different (explain on attachment) F. Cost difference between proposed substitution and specified item - savings to Owner? __________________________________________________________________________________________________ The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item and will be at no additional cost to the Owner.
Submitted to the Architect by:
Signature: ______________________________________ For Use by Design Consultant Firm: ______________________________________ Accepted ________ Accepted as Noted ________
Address: ______________________________________ Not Accepted ________ Received Too Late ________
______________________________________
Date: ______________________________________ By: _________________________________________ Telephone: ______________________________________ Date: _________________________________________ Remarks: ______________________________________________________________________________________________ 120
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 of 4 SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications including the following:
a. Governing Agency approval.
b. Bulletins.
c. Architect’s Supplemental Instructions.
d. Architect’s Change Directive.
e. Requests for Proposals.
f. Change Order Requests.
g. Cost Change Directives.
h. Change Orders.
2. Where conflicts occur between this Section and Division 00 contract requirements regarding contract modification procedures, the most restrictive requirements shall apply.
B. Division 00 contract requirements regarding contract modification procedures shall supersede requirements of this Section.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Division 00 Sections as applicable to contract requirements and modifications.
2. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Contract Modification: A change to the Contract Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor affecting the Contract Documents, the Contract Time, and/or the Contract Amount.
121
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 of 4
1.4 GOVERNING AGENCY APPROVAL
A. Governing Agency Review and Approval: Changes to the Construction Documents are subject to review and approval by the authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 BULLETINS
A. Bulletins: A form used by the Architect for issuing Architect’s Supplemental Instructions (ASI), Architect’s Change Directives (ACD), and Requests for Proposals (RFP).
1.6 ARCHITECT’S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION
A. Architect’s Supplemental Instruction (ASI): Supplemental instructions will be issued by the Architect authorizing minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
1. Architect’s Supplemental Instructions will be issued via Bulletin and signed by the Architect.
2. Contractor’s Response: Contractor shall perform the work indicated in the Architect’s Supplemental Instruction without adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If the Contractor determines that an adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time is necessary due to the Architect’s Supplemental Instruction, the Contractor shall respond to the Architect’s Supplemental Instruction as if it were an Architect/Owner initiated Request for Proposal.
1.7 ARCHITECT’S CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Architect’s Change Directive (ACD): Architect’s Change Directives will be issued by the Architect instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Architect’s Change Directives will be issued via Bulletin and signed by the Architect.
2. Architect’s Change Directives contain a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation by Contractor: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Architect’s Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.8 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS
A. Requests for Proposals: Requests for Proposals are Architect/Owner initiated requests for estimates of changes to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time for proposed 122
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 of 4 changes; Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The description may include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Requests for Proposals will be issued by the Architect via Bulletin.
2. Requests for Proposals are not authorization or instructions to either stop work in progress or execute proposed change(s).
3. Contractor’s Response: Within not more than 7 days after receipt of Request for Proposal, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.
B. Architect’s Response: Within 7 days after receipt of Contractor’s response to Architect/Owner initiated Request for Proposal, Architect will:
1. Issue a Change Order or Cost Change Directive for accepted proposals.
2. Notify the Contractor of unaccepted proposals.
3. Issue an Architect’s Change Directive where changes are necessary for the progress of the Work and changes to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time are in dispute.
1.9 CHANGE ORDER REQUEST
A. Change Order Request (COR): Change Order Requests are documents initiated by the Contractor requesting a Contract Modification due to unforeseen conditions, or latent or changed conditions.
1. Change Order Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.
2. Include a statement outlining reasons for the Change Order Request and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change.
Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
3. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
4. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
5. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 123
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 4 of 4
6. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
7. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
B. Architect’s Response: Within 7 days after receipt of Contractor’s Change Order Request, Architect will:
1. Issue a Cost Change Directive for accepted Change Order Requests that do not require changes to the approved Construction Documents.
2. Issue a Change Order and/or Cost Change Directive for accepted Change Order Requests that require changes to the approved Construction Documents. a. Where Change Order Requests require changes to the Contract Documents, Architect will provide a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work via Change Order.
3. Issue an Architect’s Change Directive where changes are necessary for the progress of the Work and changes to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time are in dispute.
4. Notify the Contractor of unaccepted proposals.
1.10 COST CHANGE DIRECTIVE (CCD)
A. Cost Change Directive: A Cost Change Directive is a document issued by the Architect notifying Contractor of Owner’s acceptance of changes to the Contract Sum proposed by the Contractor.
1.11 CHANGE ORDERS
A. Change Orders: Change orders are a document defining Contract Modifications; upon Owner's approval of proposed Contract Modifications, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form provided by Architect.
B. Governing Agency Review and Approval: Change Orders affecting changes to the approved Construction Documents shall be subject to governing agency review and approval, Architect shall submit applicable documentation to governing agency for review and approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
124
22-12479 – Ph 2 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 012613 - 1 of 4 SECTION 012613
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for preparation, submittal and response to Contractor’s Request for Information (RFI’s) during construction of project.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI, Request for Information: Request from Contractor seeking information required by or clarification of the Contract Documents.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. RFI Submittals: Submit RFI’s via email as PDF electronic files; include attachments in PDF electronic file format.
1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
125
22-12479 – Ph 2 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 012613 - 2 of 4
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Form: Use RFI form included at end of this Section or form acceptable to Architect.
Upon request from the Contractor, the form at the end of this section will be made available in WORD format from the Architect.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
1. Allow 10 working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
2. Architect will not act on any RFI’s until 7 days following the submission of the Schedule of Values per Division 01 Section “Payment Procedures.”
3. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor’s means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
4. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
5. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
6. Distribution: The Architect shall distribute one electronic copy of each completed RFI review to the Contractor and the Owner.
126
22-12479 – Ph 2 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 012613 - 3 of 4 E. Regulatory Requirements: Architect’s responses that modify the Contract Documents affecting Structural Safety, Fire and Life Safety, and/or Access Compliance may be submitted to the Authority having jurisdiction for review and approval.
F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the sequential RFI number. Submit log weekly unless otherwise directed in writing by Architect. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
G. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 7 days if Contractor disagrees with response.
H. Contractor’s Expense for RFI’s: Architect will review and respond to legitimate RFI’s at no additional cost to the Contractor. RFI’s determined by the Architect to be flagrant or unnecessary will have the expense for the Architect’s time paid by the Owner with the amount being deducted from the Contract Sum. The expense will be based on an hourly rate in accordance with the Architect’s standard hourly rate schedule in effect at the time the work is performed with a minimum of one hour for each flagrant or unnecessary RFI.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
(REQUEST FOR INFORMATION form included on the following page) 127
22-12479 – Ph 2 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 012613 - 4 of 4
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
Project:
Project Title
TETER Project No.
123 Street Address
City, State, Zip
From:
Name
Company Name
Client Project No.
DSA File No.
DSA Appl No.
Date:
Request for Information No. ______
□ Deviation from Contract Docs
□ Correction of Non-Compliant Work
To:
Name
Title or Department
TETER
123 Street Address
City, State, Zip
Drawing:_______________
Detail No.______________
Specification:___________
Addendum:_____________
Respond by:
Priority
(Low) 1 2 3 4 5 (High)
Subject: ____________________________________________________________________________ Information Requested:
Contractor’s Recommendation:
Probable Cost Effect: __________________ Probable Time Effect: __________________________ Architect’s Response:
Disclaimer
The work shall be carried out in accordance with the above supplemental instructions pursuant the Contract Documents, without change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work, according to these instructions, indicates your acknowledgement that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. If the Contractor considers that this response requires a change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall not proceed with this Work and shall promptly submit an item proposal. 128
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 of 5
SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.
1. Where conflicts occur between this Section and Division 00 contract requirements regarding payment procedures, the most restrictive requirements shall apply.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.
2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the submittal schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by the Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.
B. SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES: A statement furnished by the contractor allocating designated work identified as being caused by “ VANDALISM”, “CODE UPGRADES”, and “CITY UPGRADES”.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the S chedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule.
129
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 of 5
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
a. Architect will not act on any RFI’s, Post -Bid Substitutions, and/or changes to the project scope, cost, or schedule until 7 days following the submission of the Schedule of Values.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor.
2) Materials.
3) Equipment.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of 5 percent of Contract Sum. a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for project closeout requirements in an amount totaling 5 percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 130
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 of 5
5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. If required, include evidence of insurance.
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDUL E OF VALUES ( REQUIRED BY AWARDED
CONTRACTOR ONLY)
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES for coordination with Owner’s Insurance Representative.
1. Submit the SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES to Owner at earliest possible date but no later than 14 days after notice of pending award of the contract.
B. Format and Content:
1. Identification: Include individual line item costs (including all associated labor, materials and equipment) for all denoted “VANDALISM” items as included in Part
3.1 – SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES MATRIX.
1.6 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 131
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 of 5
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment application shall be as indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
1. If dates and periods are not indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor at time of bidding, the date for Application for Payment shall be established by the Owner to correspond with the Owner’s administrative procedures in order to allow for processing and approval of Application for Payment. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment shall be one month.
2. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment 7 days prior to due date for review by Architect.
C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner -requested project acceleration.
E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment.
b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials. c. Additional materials stored with this Application.
d. Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application.
4. The amount of stored materials must be pre-approved by the City Engineer. 132
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5 of 5
F. Transmittal: Submit 6 signed original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.
4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
6. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work.
7. Initial progress report.
8. Report of preconstruction conference.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
133
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013113 - 1 of 3 SECTION 013113
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General project coordination procedures.
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. List of Key Personnel Names: Within 14 calendar days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
134
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013113 - 2 of 3
1.4 COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.
135
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013113 - 3 of 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
A. Examination of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to examine both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period.
C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
END OF SECTION
136
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 013119 - 1 of 5
SECTION 013119
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Preconstruction conferences.
2. Preinstallation conferences.
3. Progress meetings.
4. Project Closeout Conference.
B. Related requirements include but are not limited to the following:
1. Division 01 Sections as applicable to project management.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction at the project site, at a time convenient to the Owner, and the Architect, but no later than 14 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at the Project Site or another convenient location. Owner and Architect to conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent shall attend the conference. Major subcontractors and other concerned parties shall be invited to attend the conference, but attendance is not mandatory. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including but not limited to the following:
1. Tentative construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
3. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
4. Lines of communication.
5. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
6. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
137
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 013119 - 2 of 5
7. Procedures for RFI’s.
8. Procedures for testing and inspection.
9. Submittal procedures.
10. Sustainability requirements including construction waste management and disposal.
11. Preparation of record documents.
12. Use of the premises.
13. Work restrictions and working hours.
14. Temporary facilities and controls.
15. Parking availability.
16. Office, work, and storage areas.
17. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
18. Safety procedures and first aid.
19. Security.
20. Housekeeping.
21. Owner’s alcohol, drug and tobacco policy.
D. Minutes: Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreements achieved.
Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
B. Attendees: Installers and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
C. Agenda: Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following:
1. Contract Documents.
2. Options.
3. Related RFI’s, Proposal Requests, and Change Orders.
4. Purchases.
5. Deliveries.
6. Submittals.
7. Sustainability requirements.
8. Potential conflicts.
9. Compatibility problems.
10. Time schedules.
11. Weather limitations.
12. Manufacturer's written instructions.
13. Warranty requirements.
14. Compatibility of materials.
15. Acceptability of substrates.
138
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 013119 - 3 of 5
16. Temporary facilities.
17. Space and access limitations.
18. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
19. Safety.
20. Testing and inspecting requirements.
21. Required performance results.
22. Recording requirements.
23. Protection.
24. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.
D. Minutes: Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreements achieved.
Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals to be established by the Architect, Inspector of Record, Contractor, and Owner.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request.
B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and Architect, each subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. Review proposed percentages of work completed for current months progress payment.
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so.
Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
a. Interface requirements.
b. Sequence of operation.
c. Status of submittals.
d. Status of Sustainability documentation.
e. Deliveries.
f. Off-site fabrication.
g. Access.
139
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 013119 - 4 of 5
h. Site utilization.
i. Temporary facilities and services.
j. Status of correction of deficient items.
k. Field observations.
l. Status of RFI’s, Proposal Requests, and Change Orders. m. Progress cleaning.
n. Quality and work standards.
o. Documentation of information for payment requests.
p. Request for Information
D. Minutes: Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreements achieved.
Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
E. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule to the Owner, the Architect, and all other parties involved in the project. Failure to revise and keep current the Contractor’s construction schedule may be grounds for returning Application for Payment unreviewed.
1.6 PROJECT CLOSEOUT CONFERENCE
A. Project Closeout Conference: Conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but not less than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.
B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:
1. Preparation of record documents.
2. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance.
3. Submittal of written warranties.
4. Requirements for completing Sustainability documentation.
5. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
6. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
7. Requirements for demonstration and training.
8. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
9. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment.
10. Submittal procedures.
11. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 140
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 013119 - 5 of 5
D. Minutes: Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreements achieved.
Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
141
22-12479 - Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 of 7 SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Special reports.
B. Related Sections include but are not limited to the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
2. Division 01 Section "Quality and Testing Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
142
22-12479 - Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 of 7 E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
F. Milestone: An activity, which occurs in an instant and thus has no time duration, a key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
2. PDF electronic file.
B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.
1. Submit electronic copy of schedule labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.
D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
E. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
2. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
3. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
4. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies.
5. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including commissioning activities.
6. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
7. Review procedures for updating schedule.
143
22-12479 - Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 of 7
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules with performance of construction activities and with scheduling of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the submittal schedule and other required schedules.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
5. Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
144
22-12479 - Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 of 7
2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Uninterruptible services.
c. Use of premises restrictions.
d. Seasonal variations.
e. Environmental control.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Submittals.
b. Purchases.
c. Mockups.
d. Fabrication.
e. Sample testing.
f. Deliveries.
g. Installation.
h. Tests and inspections.
i. Adjusting.
j. Curing.
k. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
6. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
b. Permanent space enclosure.
c. Completion of mechanical installation.
d. Completion of electrical installation.
e. Substantial Completion.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
145
22-12479 - Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 of 7 F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.
H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.
Prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.
b. Mobilization and demobilization.
c. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing
j. Commissioning.
k. Punch list and final completion.
l. Activities occurring following final completion.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 146
22-12479 - Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 of 7
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.
B. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
C. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
2. Description of activity.
3. Main events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
D. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.3 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.
1. Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
147
22-12479 - Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 7 of 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At progress meetings, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION
148
22-12479 – Ph 2 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1 of 2 SECTION 013233
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Concealed Work photographs.
3. Periodic construction photographs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Digital Photographs: Submit image files at monthly intervals coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment.
1. Submit photos by uploading to Project FTP site. Include copy of key plan indicating each photograph's location and direction.
2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description:
a. Date photograph was taken.
b. Description of location, vantage point, and direction. c. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.
3. Key Plan: Include key plan of Project site and/or building(s) indicating location and direction of each photograph or group of photographs. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.
1.4 PHOTOGRAPHIC FORMATS AND MEDIA
A. Digital Photographs: Provide color images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 12 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. Use flash in low light levels or backlit conditions.
B. Digital Images: Submit digital media as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
C. File Names: Name media files with location or area photograph was taken, date, and sequential numbering suffix.
149
22-12479 – Ph 2 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2 of 2
1.5 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. General: Take photographs with maximum depth of field and in focus.
B. Key Plan: Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.
C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of the Work, take photographs of Project site and adjacent areas, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as necessary to record preconstruction conditions.
1. Take additional photographs as needed to record settlement or cracking of existing adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements.
D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs to record construction progress at not greater than bi-weekly intervals with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
E. Concealed Work Photographs: Before proceeding with installing work that will conceal other work, take photographs sufficient in number, with annotated descriptions, to record nature and location of concealed Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Underground utilities.
2. Underslab services.
3. Piping.
4. Electrical conduit.
5. Waterproofing and weather-resistant barriers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
150
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 of 9
SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
2. Cost for multiple resubmittals.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section “Payment Procedures” for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.
2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for general project coordination.
3. Division 01 Section "Quality and Testing Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports, and schedule of tests and inspections.
4. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals.
1.3 SUBMITTAL FORMAT AND PROCEDURES
A. General: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval.
2. Architect will not review submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
B. Electronic Digital Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package unless otherwise indicated, incorporate complete information into each PDF file, name PDF file with submittal number, and transmit submittal package to Architect via email.
1. Paper Submittals: Where paper submittals are requested, necessary, or required in lieu of electronic submittals, prepare submittals in paper form and deliver to Architect.
Transmit each paper submittal using transmittal form. Comply with the following:
151
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 of 9
a. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification; include name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. b. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. c. Number of Copies: Submit not less than three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. d. Transmittal for Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using transmittal form.
C. Submittal Cover Page Information: Include the following information on the submittal cover page for each submittal:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Architect.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section number with sequential alphanumeric identifier and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals.
8. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for each of multiple items.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Indication of full or partial submittal.
11. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
12. Other necessary identification.
13. Remarks.
14. Signature of transmitter.
15. Contractor’s review/approval stamp of size required by contractor, approximately 3 inches by 3 inches, on or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval.
16. Space for Architect’s review stamp of not less than 4 inches wide by 3-1/2 inches high on or beside title block to record Architect’s review stamp and action taken by Architect.
D. Product Options:
1. Clearly identify options requiring selection by Architect.
2. Clearly identify product options required to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.
F. Field Conditions: Indicate field conditions where applicable to the work associated with the submittal.
152
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 of 9
G. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate timing of submitting submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review related submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
H. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 14 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 calendar days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 calendar days for initial review of each submittal.
5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 14 calendar days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.
I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
153
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 of 9
J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
K. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final submittals that are marked with acceptable notation from Architect's action stamp.
1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrently with Samples.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
154
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 of 9
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Drawing Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, prepare Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in PDF format unless otherwise indicated.
C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Project name and submittal number.
b. Generic description of Sample.
c. Product name and name of manufacturer.
d. Sample source.
e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. Submit samples in PDF format unless physical samples are required.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal. 155
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 of 9
F. Certificates:
1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.
2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms.
Include names of firms and personnel certified.
G. Test and Research Reports:
1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:
a. Name of evaluation organization.
b. Date of evaluation.
156
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 of 9
c. Time period when report is in effect.
d. Product and manufacturers' names.
e. Description of product.
f. Test procedures and results.
g. Limitations of use.
1.5 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file(s) of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Contractor’s Review of Submittals: Contractor shall review each submittal and check for completeness, coordination with other Work of the Contract, and compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval.
2. Contractor’s approval shall certify the following actions by the Contractor:
a. Field measurements have been determined, verified, and indicated on submittal.
b. Field conditions have been verified and coordinated with Work associated with the submittal.
c. The Work associated with the submittal is in conformance with the Contract Documents.
157
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 of 9
d. Work being performed by various subcontractors and trades is coordinated with Work associated with the submittal including work being performed by others for the Owner.
e. Deviations from the Contract Documents are identified and notes.
1.7 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW
A. Architect’s Review and Action: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, mark with an action stamp indicating one of the following actions, and return it.
1. Reviewed: Final unrestricted release, work may proceed, provided it complies with the Contract Documents.
2. Furnish as Corrected: Final but restricted release, work may proceed, provided written confirmation is delivered to Architect by Contractor that installed work complied with notations and corrections on submittal and with Contract Documents.
3. Revise and Resubmit: Returned for resubmittal, do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain an acceptable action marking. Do not allow submittals with this marking (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the Work.
4. Rejected: Submittal content varies from the Contract Documents and is not acceptable for use on the Project, do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain an acceptable action marking. Do not allow submittals with this marking (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the Work.
B. Non-conforming Submittals: The following are considered non-confirming submittals and will not be reviewed by the Architect.
1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval.
2. Architect will not review submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
3. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.
4. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.
C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
158
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 of 9
1.8 COST FOR MULTIPLE RESUBMITTALS
A. Contractor’s initial submittal and one resubmittal are included in the Architect’s Construction Administration services to the Owner. Architect’s services for review of subsequent resubmittals will be charged to the Owner at the Architect’s current billing rate, and the Owner will deduct the charges from the Contract Amount by a change order.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
159
22-12479 QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 of 8 SECTION 014000
QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control including but not limited to the following:
1. General quality requirements.
2. Reports and documents.
3. Contractor’s responsibilities for testing and inspections.
4. Testing Agency.
5. Governing agency testing and inspection requirements.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having Jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Division 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced," unless otherwise further described, means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
160
22-12479 QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 of 8 B. Field Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a Work result does not require that certain construction activities specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed either as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Unless otherwise indicated, copies of reports of tests or inspections performed for other than the Project do not meet this definition.
F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
G. Source Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source (e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop).
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. The term "testing laboratory" shall have the same meaning as the term "testing agency." I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work, to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work, to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements is specified and the standards or requirements establish 161
22-12479 QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 of 8 different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, inform the Architect regarding the conflict and obtain clarification prior to proceeding with the Work.
Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for clarification before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Reports shall be prepared by the person performing the testing and inspecting. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Provide written report documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Reports shall be prepared by Manufacturer's technical representative performing the testing and inspecting. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 162
22-12479 QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 of 8 C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Provide written report documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Reports shall be prepared by Factory-authorized service representative performing the testing and inspecting.
Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally licensed to practice in the state where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in 163
22-12479 QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 of 8 individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following Contractor's responsibilities, including the following:
1. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
2. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
3. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.
4. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.
5. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
6. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
7. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for testing agency services will be paid by the Owner.
3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be paid by the 164
22-12479 QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 of 8 Owner and the amount will be deducted from the Contract Sum by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. When Contractor engages a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services, Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed.
4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.
D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
E. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. 165
22-12479 QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 of 8 F. Contractor's Associated Requirements and Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.
6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect’s, Commissioning Authority's, and authorities' having jurisdiction reference during normal working hours.
1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents. 166
22-12479 QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 8 of 8
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION
167
22-12479 Ph 2 REFERENCES 014200 - 1 of 4
SECTION 014200
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. Architect’s approval does not release the Contractor from the responsibility to fulfill Contract requirements.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
168
22-12479 Ph 2 REFERENCES 014200 - 2 of 4
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org.
2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.
2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.
3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov.
4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.
9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
169
22-12479 Ph 2 REFERENCES 014200 - 3 of 4
10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.
11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov.
12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.
14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org.
15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.
16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov.
18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org.
19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).
4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).
5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.
6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).
7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.
8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB).
E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.
2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.
3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 170
22-12479 Ph 2 REFERENCES 014200 - 4 of 4
4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org.
5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.
6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.
7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development; www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
171
22-12479 – Ph 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 of 8 SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 Section "Summary of Work" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
2. Division 01 Section “Fire Safety During Construction” for fire safety requirements during construction.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation, removal, and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use; provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1. Water service is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.
C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use; provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1. Electric power service is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.
172
22-12479 – Ph 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 of 8
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:
1. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, California Code requirements as applicable to the project.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules.
5. Environmental protection regulations.
6. Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials for temporary facilities shall be acceptable to Architect, Owner, and Authorities having Jurisdiction (AHJ), shall be appropriate for intended use, and shall comply with governing codes and regulations.
B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts. Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.
173
22-12479 – Ph 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 of 8 C. Fencing Windscreen: Polyester fabric scrim with grommets for attachment to chain link fence, size and color as acceptable to, or required by, authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.
2.2 TEMPORARY STORAGE FACILITIES
A. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
1. Store combustible materials apart from buildings.
2.3 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use by construction and related administrative personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
Temporary toilets shall be self-contained, single-occupant units of the chemical, aerated recirculation type; provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. Use of Owner’s sanitary facilities is not permitted.
1. Accessible Sanitary Facilities: Sanitary facilities serving support facilities such as offices, meeting rooms, plan rooms, and serving personnel not directly associated with the actual processes of construction shall be accessible for a person using a wheelchair and shall comply with CBC Section 11B-213 (Ref. CBC 11B-201.4).
2.4 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL
A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 174
22-12479 – Ph 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 of 8
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities at locations directed by the Owner where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND BUILDING HVAC
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.
1. Existing Water Service: Where connection to Owner’s existing water service is available and allowed, clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
C. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Where temporary power service is required, install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where Owner’s existing power service is available, connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner, maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.
D. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.
3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate storage containers, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access in the areas designated and approved by the Architect and Owner. Comply with the following:
1. Do not locate temporary sheds within 30 feet of building lines.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after 175
22-12479 – Ph 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 of 8 Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Project Address Sign: Provide temporary project address sign as required by Authority having Jurisdiction.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations.
1. Comply with requirements of the following:
a. Authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning. c. Division 01 Section "Construction Waste and Disposal."
2. Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.
E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of Contractor’s and Owner’s materials stored on premises.
176
22-12479 – Ph 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 of 8 C. Provide barricades, barriers and enclosures as required to protect the public from construction operations and material stored on the premises.
D. Lock vehicles, such as passenger cars, trucks and other mechanized or motorized construction equipment, when parked and unattended, so as to prevent unauthorized use. Do not leave such vehicles or equipment unattended with the motor running or the ignition key in place.
E. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary of Work." F. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
G. Security Enclosure Fence and Lockup: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install project enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering the site except by entrance gates. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
I. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.
K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking specified in other Sections.
177
22-12479 – Ph 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7 of 8
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed.
Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. General: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Protect porous materials from water damage.
2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
4. Remove standing water from decks.
5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
2. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
3. Discard or replace water-damaged material.
4. Do not install material that is wet.
5. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 178
22-12479 – Ph 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 8 of 8 D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION
179
22-12479 – Ph 2 FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION 015116 - 1 of 6 SECTION 015116
FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for fire safety during construction and demolition.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for additional facilities, requirements, and procedures required during construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire- prevention program.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of the following:
1. NFPA 241.
2. California Fire Code, 2019 Edition, Chapter 33 “Fire Safety During Construction and Demolition” and the 2019 Editions of the following California Codes as Referenced by the California Fire Code:
a. California Building Code (CBC).
b. California Mechanical Code (CMC).
c. California Plumbing Code (CPC).
d. California Electrical Code (CEC).
B. Temporary Heating Equipment (CFC 3303):
1. General: Temporary heating devices shall be listed and labeled in accordance with the California Mechanical Code. Installation, maintenance and use of temporary heating devices shall be in accordance with the terms of the listing. 180
22-12479 – Ph 2 FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION 015116 - 2 of 6
2. LP-Gas heaters: Heating devices shall be temporary, self-contained, liquid- propane-gas heaters with individual space thermostatic control. Fuel supplies for liquefied petroleum gas fired heaters shall comply with the California Fire Code, Chapter 61 Liquefied Petroleum Gases, and the California Mechanical Code.
3. Refueling: Refueling operations for liquid fueled equipment or appliances shall be conducted in accordance with the California Fire Code, Section 5705. The equipment or appliance shall be allowed to cool prior to refueling.
4. Installation: Clearance to combustibles from temporary heating devices shall be maintained in accordance with the labeled equipment. When in operation, temporary heating devices shall be fixed in place and protected from damage, dislodgement or overturning in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Supervision: The use of temporary heating devices shall be supervised and maintained only by competent personnel.
6. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.
C. Precautions Against Fire (CFC 3304):
1. Smoking: Smoking shall not be allowed on the project site.
2. Combustible Debris, Rubbish and Waste:
a. Combustible debris, rubbish and waste shall not be accumulated within buildings.
b. Combustible debris, rubbish and waste material shall be removed from buildings at the end of each shift of work.
c. Rubbish containers with a capacity exceeding 5.33 cubic feet (40 gallons) used for temporary storage of combustible debris, rubbish and waste materials, shall have tight fitting or self-closing lids. Such containers shall be constructed entirely of materials that are non-combustible or materials that meet a peak rate of heat release not exceeding 300 kW/m 2 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1354 at an incident heat flux of 50 kW/m2 in the horizontal orientation.
d. Materials susceptible to spontaneous ignition, such as oily rags, shall be stored in a listed disposal container.
3. Burning: Burning of materials shall not be allowed on the project site.
4. Fire Watch: Where required by the fire code official, a fire watch shall be provided for building demolition and for building construction during working hours that is hazardous in nature, such as temporary heating or hot work. a. Trained personnel shall be provided to serve as an on-site fire watch. Fire watch personnel shall be provided with not less than one approved means for notification of the fire department, and the sole duty of such personnel shall be to perform constant patrols and watch for the occurrence of fire.
The combination of fire watch duties and site security is acceptable. Fire watch personnel shall be trained in the use of portable fire extinguishers. b. The fire watch personnel shall keep a record of all time periods of duty, including a log entry each time the site was patrolled, and each time a structure under construction was entered and inspected. The records and log entries shall be made available for review by the fire code official upon request.
181
22-12479 – Ph 2 FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION 015116 - 3 of 6
5. Cutting and Welding: Welding, cutting, open torches, and other hot work operations and equipment shall comply with California Fire Code, Chapter 35 “Welding and Other Hot Work.’
6. Temporary Wiring for Electrical Power: Temporary wiring for electrical power and lighting installations used in connection with the construction, alteration or demolition of buildings, structures, equipment or similar activities shall comply with the California Electrical Code.
D. Flammable and Combustible Liquids (CFC 3305):
1. Storage of Flammable and Combustible Liquids: Storage of flammable and combustible liquids shall be in accordance with the California Fire Code, Section 5704.
2. Class I and Class II Liquids: Storage, use, and handling of flammable and combustible liquids at construction sites shall be in accordance with the California Fire Code, Section 5706.2. Ventilation shall be provided for operations involving the application of materials containing flammable solvents.
3. Housekeeping: Flammable and combustible liquid storage areas shall be maintained clear of combustible vegetation and waste materials. Such storage areas shall not be used for the storage of combustible materials.
4. Precautions Against Fire: Sources of ignition and smoking shall be prohibited in flammable and combustible liquid storage areas. Signs shall be posted in accordance the California Fire Code, Section 310.
5. Handling at Point of Final Use: Class I and Class II liquids shall be kept in approved safety containers.
6. Leakage and Spills: Leaking vessels shall be immediately repaired or taken out of service and spills shall be cleaned up and disposed of properly.
E. Flammable Gases (CFC 3306):
1. Storage and Handling: Storage and handling of flammable gasses shall comply with the California Fire Code, Chapter 58 “Flammable Gases and Flammable Cryogenic Fluids.”
2. Cleaning with Flammable Gases: Flammable gases shall not be used to clean or remove debris from piping open to the atmosphere.
F. Explosive Materials (CFC 3307): Explosive materials shall not be allowed.
G. Contractor’s Responsibility for Fire Protection (CFC 3308)
1. Program Development: The Contractor shall be responsible for the development, implementation and maintenance of a written plan establishing a fire prevention program at the project site applicable throughout all phases of the construction.
2. Program Superintendent: The Contractor shall appoint a person to be the Fire Prevention Program Superintendent who shall be responsible for the fire prevention program and ensure that it is carried out through completion of the project. The fire prevention program superintendent shall have the authority to enforce the provisions of the California Fire Code, Chapter 33, and other provisions as necessary to secure the intent of the California Fire Code, Chapter
33. Where guard service is provided in accordance with NFPA 241, the superintendent shall be responsible for the guard service. 182
22-12479 – Ph 2 FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION 015116 - 4 of 6
3. Prefire Plans: The fire prevention program superintendent shall develop and maintain an approved prefire plan in cooperation with the fire chief. The fire chief and the fire code official shall be notified of changes affecting the utilization of information contained in such prefire plans.
4. Training: Training of responsible personnel in the use of fire protection equipment shall be the responsibility of the fire prevention program superintendent. Records of training shall be kept and made a part of the written plan for the fire prevention program.
5. Fire Protection Devices: The fire prevention program superintendent shall determine that all fire protection equipment is maintained and serviced in accordance with the California Fire Code. The quantity and type of fire protection equipment shall be approved. Fire protection equipment shall be inspected in accordance with the fire prevention program.
6. Hot Work Operations: The fire prevention program superintendent shall be responsible for supervising the permit system for hot work operations in accordance with the California Fire Code, Chapter 35.
7. Impairment of Fire Protection Systems: Impairments to any fire protection system shall be in accordance with the California Fire Code, Section 901. a. Smoke detectors and smoke alarms located in an area where airborne construction dust is expected shall be covered to prevent exposure to dust or shall be temporarily removed. smoke detectors and alarms that were removed shall be replaced upon conclusion of dust producing work. Smoke detectors and smoke alarms that were covered shall be inspected and cleaned, as necessary, upon conclusion of dust producing work.
8. Temporary Covering of Fire Protection Devices: Temporary coverings placed on or over fire protection devices to protect them from damage during construction processes shall be immediately removed upon the completion of the construction processes in the room or area in which the devices are installed.
H. Fire Reporting (CFC 3309)
1. Emergency Telephone: Emergency telephone facilities with ready access shall be provided in an approved location at the construction site, or an approved equivalent means of communication shall be provided. The street address of the construction site and the emergency telephone number of the fire department shall be posted adjacent to the telephone. Alternatively, where an equivalent means of communication has been approved, the site address and fire department emergency telephone number shall be posted at the main entrance to the site, in guard shacks, and in the construction site office.
I. Access for Fire Fighting (CFC 3310):
1. Required Access: Approved vehicle access for firefighting shall be provided to all construction or demolition sites. Vehicle access shall be provided to within 100 feet of temporary or permanent fire department connections. Vehicle access shall be provided by either temporary or permanent roads capable of supporting vehicle loading under all weather conditions. Vehicle access shall be maintained until permanent fire apparatus access roads are available. 183
22-12479 – Ph 2 FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION 015116 - 5 of 6
2. Key Boxes: Key boxes shall be provided as required by the California Fire Code, Chapter 5 “Fire Service Features.”
J. Means of Egress (CFC 3311):
1. Stairways Required: (Requirements not applicable to buildings less than 50 feet in height or less than four stories).
2. Means of Egress: Required means of egress and required accessible means of egress shall be maintained during construction and demolition, remodeling or alterations and additions to any building unless an approved temporary means of egress system is provided.
K. Water Supply for Fire Protection (CFC 3312):
1. Water Supply for Fire Protection: An approved water supply for fire protection, either temporary or permanent, shall be made available as soon as combustible material arrives on site.
L. Automatic Sprinkler System (CFC 3314):
1. Completion Before Occupancy: In buildings where an automatic sprinkler system is required by the California Fire Code or California Building Code, it shall be unlawful to occupy any portion of a building or structure until the automatic sprinkler system installation has been tested and approved, except as provided in California Fire Code Section 105.3.4.
2. Operation of Valves: In buildings where an automatic sprinkler system is provided, operation of sprinkler control valves shall be allowed only by properly authorized personnel and shall be accompanied by notification of duly designated parties. Where the sprinkler protection is being regularly turned off and on to facilitate connection of newly completed segments, the sprinkler control valves shall be checked at the end of each work period to ascertain that protection is in service.
M. Portable Fire Extinguishers (CFC 3315):
1. Portable Fire Extinguishers: Structures under construction, alteration or demolition shall be provided with not less than one approved portable fire extinguisher in accordance with the California Fire Code, Section 906 and sized for not less than ordinary hazard, as follows:
a. At each stairway on all floor levels where combustible materials have accumulated.
b. In every storage and construction shed.
c. Additional portable fire extinguishers shall be provided where special hazards exist including, but not limited to, the storage and use of flammable and combustible liquids.
184
22-12479 – Ph 2 FIRE SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION 015116 - 6 of 6 N. Motorized Construction Equipment (CFC 3316):
1. Conditions of Use: Internal combustion powered construction equipment shall be used in accordance with all of the following conditions:
a. Equipment shall be located so that exhausts do not discharge against combustible material.
b. Exhausts shall be piped to the outside of the building. c. Equipment shall not be refueled while in operation.
d. Fuel for equipment shall be stored in approved areas outside of the building.
O. Safeguarding Roofing Operations (CFC 3317):
1. General: Roofing operations utilizing heat producing systems or other ignition sources shall be conducted in accordance with California Fire Code Sections 3317.2 and 3317.3, and Chapter 35.
2. Asphalt and Tar Kettles: Asphalt and tar kettles shall be operated in accordance with the California Fire Code, Section 303.
3. Fire Extinguishers for Roofing Operations: Fire extinguishers shall comply with the California Fire Code, Section 906. There shall be not less than one multi- purpose portable fire extinguisher with a minimum 3-A 40-B:C rating on the roof being covered or repaired.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT, GENERAL
A. Temporary Equipment: Temporary equipment shall comply with requirements of Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls,” and shall comply with the requirements of this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fire Safety Observation, Procedures, and Features: Provide fire safety observation activities, procedures, and features as required and in compliance with regulatory requirements.
END OF SECTION
185
22-12479 – Ph 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 of 5
SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, which is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
3. Comparable Products: Products of a listed manufacturer that are demonstrated to meet or exceed the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified ‘Basis of Design’ product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 186
22-12479 – Ph 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 of 5
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Submittals: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" and submittal requirements of Division 02 through 33 Sections to show compliance with product requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 187
22-12479 – Ph 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 of 5
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Warranty Submittals: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 188
22-12479 – Ph 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 of 5
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Restricted List: Where Specifications include the phrase “provide one of the following” or similar phrase and lists 2 or more manufacturers and/or products, provide one of the products indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer or product.
2. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include the phrase “includes, but are not limited to the following” or similar phrase, provide one of the products indicated or an unnamed product that complies with requirements indicated.
3. Basis of Design: Where Specifications include the phrase “Basis of Design” and lists a named manufacturer and product, provide the product indicated. a. Where a “Comparable” product of listed manufacturers is indicated following a “Basis of Design” manufacturer/product, a comparable product of one of the listed manufacturers may be provided in lieu of the basis of design manufacturer/product subject to compliance with product requirements and the following:
1) Evidence that the proposed product:
a) Does not require revisions to the Contract Documents. b) Is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results.
c) Is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2) Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3) Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. b. Where no “Comparable” manufacturers/products are indicated following a “Basis of Design” manufacturer/product, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer or product.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
189
22-12479 – Ph 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 of 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCT INSTALLATION
A. General: Install products in accordance with Drawings, Specifications, and product manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Installation shall include examination of conditions and preparations necessary for proper installation.
END OF SECTION
190
22-12479 – Ph 2 EXECUTION 017300 - 1 of 7
SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Installation of the Work.
2. Cutting, patching and repairing.
3. Progress cleaning.
4. Protection of installed construction.
5. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 Section "Summary of Work" for limits on use of Project site.
2. Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Route: A continuous unobstructed path connecting accessible elements and spaces of an accessible site, building or facility that can be negotiated by a person with a disability using a wheelchair, and that is also safe for and usable by persons with other disabilities. Interior accessible routes may include corridors, hallways, floors, ramps, elevators and lifts. Exterior accessible routes may include accessible parking stalls and access aisles, curb ramps, crosswalks at vehicular ways, walks, ramps and lifts.
B. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.
C. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.
191
22-12479 – Ph 2 EXECUTION 017300 - 2 of 7
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting of structural elements must be performed, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.
2. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:
a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
b. Membranes and flashings.
c. Sprayed fire-resistive material.
d. Equipment supports.
e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
3. Visual Elements: Cut and patch construction in a manner that results in no visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in Division 02 trough 33 Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in- place materials.
192
22-12479 – Ph 2 EXECUTION 017300 - 3 of 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1. Description of the Work.
2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
4. Recommended corrections.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
193
22-12479 – Ph 2 EXECUTION 017300 - 4 of 7
C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Request for Information."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
194
22-12479 – Ph 2 EXECUTION 017300 - 5 of 7
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
3.4 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND REPAIRING
A. Cutting, Patching and Repairing, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting, patching, and/or repairing. Proceed with cutting, patching, and repairing at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
D. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
E. Patching and Repairing: Patch and repair construction by grinding, filling, leveling, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. 195
22-12479 – Ph 2 EXECUTION 017300 - 6 of 7
F. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
196
22-12479 – Ph 2 EXECUTION 017300 - 7 of 7
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION
197
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1 of 6 SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Recycling nonhazardous construction and demolition waste.
2. Disposing of nonhazardous construction and demolition waste.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings and structures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition and construction waste becomes property of Contractor. 198
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2 of 6
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit Waste Management Plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed indicating method of compliance with the California Green Building Standards Code.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Use separate forms for construction waste and demolition waste. Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons.
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.
C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, or individual employee assigned by the General Contractor, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements. Individual of firm, or Contractor’s employee, shall be a LEED-Accredited Professional, certified by the USGBC, as waste management coordinator.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with transportation and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
199
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 3 of 6 C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construction Waste Management: Refer to CGBSC Section 5.408.1 Construction Waste Management. Recycle and/or salvage for reuse a minimum of 65 percent of the non-hazardous construction and demolition waste in accordance with CGBSC Section 5.408.1.1, 5.408.1.2, or
5.408.1.3 (Below) or meet a local construction and demolition waste management ordinance, whichever is more stringent:
1. GBSC Section 5.408.1.1, Construction Waste Management Plan: Where a local jurisdiction does not have a construction and demolition waste management ordinance that is more stringent, provide Waste Management Plan that:
a. Identifies the construction and demolition waste materials to be diverted from disposal by efficient usage, recycling, reuse on the project or salvage for future use or sale.
b. Determines if construction and demolition waste materials will be sorted on-site (source separated) or bulk mixed (single stream).
c. Identifies diversion facilities where construction and demolition waste material collected will be taken.
d. Specifies the amount of construction and demolition waste materials diverted shall be calculated by weight or volume, but not by both.
2. GBSC Section 5.408.1.2, Waste Management Company: Utilize a waste management company that can provide verifiable documentation that the percentage of construction and demolition waste material diverted from the landfill complies with CGBSC Section
5.408.1.
a. Exception 1: Excavated soil and land-clearing debris. b. Exception 2: Alternate waste reduction methods developed by working with local agencies if diversion or recycle facilities capable of compliance with this item do not exist.
c. Demolition waste meeting local ordinance or calculated in consideration of local recycling facilities and markets.
200
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 4 of 6
3. GBSC Section 5.408.1.3, Waste Stream Reduction Alternative: The combined weight of new construction disposal that does not exceed two pounds per square foot of building area may be deemed to meet the 65 percent minimum requirement as approved by the enforcing agency.
B. Documentation, CGBSC Section 5.408.1.4: Documentation shall be provided to the enforcing agency which demonstrates compliance with Sections 5.408.1.1. through 5.408.1.3. The Waste management plan shall be updated as necessary and shall be accessible during construction for examination by the enforcing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management procedures. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management procedures during the entire duration of the Contract.
1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.
C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1. Distribute waste management procedures to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.
2. Distribute waste management procedures to entities when they first begin work on-site.
Review procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
201
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 5 of 6
3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: Refer to local county websites for the county in which the Project is located for listings of available recycling receivers and processors, and materials accepted.
C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
D. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
E. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.
3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Wood Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
202
22-12479 – Ph 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 6 of 6 B. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Sections as applicable to planting for use of clean sawdust as organic mulch.
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION
203
22-12479 – Ph 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 of 4
SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Closeout procedures at completion.
2. Final cleaning.
3. Repair of the Work.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Submit the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout documentation specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record drawings, operation and maintenance data, warranties, and similar final record information.
3. Submit closeout documentation specified in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Submit maintenance materials specified in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
5. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
204
22-12479 – Ph 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 of 4
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.
6. Advise Owner of changeover in utilities.
7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
8. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
9. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for inspection. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected.
1. Architect’s Punch List: During inspection, Architect will prepare a list of items needing completion or correction (punch list), a copy of the punch list will be distributed to the Contractor and Owner.
2. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspection as incomplete is completed or corrected.
3. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
E. Contractor’s Cost for Reinspection: Architect will perform one inspection and one reinspection at no additional cost to the Contractor. The expense for the Architect’s time for additional inspections will be paid by the Owner with the amount being deducted from the Contract Sum. The expense will be based on an hourly rate in accordance with the Architect’s standard hourly rate schedule in effect at the time the work is performed with a minimum of $400.00 dollars for each additional reinspection.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 205
22-12479 – Ph 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 of 4
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect (Company name).
d. Name of Contractor (Company Name).
e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in one of the following formats:
a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with the California Green Building Standards Code maximum allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
206
22-12479 – Ph 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 of 4
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Remove labels that are not permanent.
C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste and Disposal."
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repairs and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.
1. Comply with requirements of Division 02 through 33 Sections as applicable to the Work to be restored and/or repaired.
END OF SECTION
207
22-12479 – Ph 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 – 1 of 9 SECTION 017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance documentation, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Systems and equipment operation manuals.
4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
5. Product maintenance manuals.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for demonstration and training materials.
3. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Closeout Submittal: Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as previously reviewed and approved at the time of individual Section submittals; where applicable, clarify and update previously reviewed content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1. Initial Submittal: Submit draft electronic copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittal is acceptable. a. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments.
Submit final submittal copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of 208
22-12479 – Ph 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 – 2 of 9 receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.
2. Final Submittal: Submit in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Submit the following:
a. Paper Copy: Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints that have been revised to address Architect’s comments from the initial submittal.
b. Digital Data Files: Submit digital data files of Project Record Drawings as PDF files on a thumb-drive.
B. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.
1.4 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Electronic File Manuals: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available.
Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
B. Paper Copy Manuals: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf or post-type binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number(s) on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 209
22-12479 – Ph 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 – 3 of 9
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross- referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials and in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information as applicable:
1. Subject matter included in the manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for the following:
a. Contractor.
b. Installer.
c. Architect.
d. Commissioning Authority if applicable.
e. Architect’s major consultants that designed the systems contained in the manuals.
6. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 210
22-12479 – Ph 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 – 4 of 9 C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY MANUAL A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
List items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include the following:
1. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
2. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
3. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.
1.7 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
211
22-12479 – Ph 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 – 5 of 9 C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
1.8 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS
A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
212
22-12479 – Ph 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 – 6 of 9
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
C. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.
F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.
1.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. 213
22-12479 – Ph 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 – 7 of 9 B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.
C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identify by product name and arrange to match table of contents. For each piece of equipment, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
214
22-12479 – Ph 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 – 8 of 9
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.
G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.
I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals.
1.10 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
C. Source Information: List each product included in data identified by product name and arranged to match table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 215
22-12479 – Ph 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 – 9 of 9
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.
G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
216
22-12479 – Ph 2 WARRANTIES 017836 - 1 of 3
SECTION 017836
WARRANTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers’ standard warranties on products and special warranties.
B. Related Sections include but are not limited to the following:
1. Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures.”
2. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data.”
3. Division 02 through 33 Sections for specific warranty requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
B. Special project warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.
1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
B. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.
217
22-12479 – Ph 2 WARRANTIES 017836 - 2 of 3
C. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
D. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
E. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
F. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
1.5 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.
C. Warranties: Submit (2) copies of each required warranty properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.
1. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
2. Include copy of each warranty in operation and maintenance documentation. 218
22-12479 – Ph 2 WARRANTIES 017836 - 3 of 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
219
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 017839 – 1 of 4 SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Drawings:
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Use of Architect’s Electronic Files” for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for surveys of exterior accessible routes.
3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.
1.3 RECORD DRAWING SUBMITTAL
A. Closeout Submittal: Submit Record Drawings as follows:
1. Initial Submittal: Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. a. Architect will indicate whether record prints are acceptable or if additional information or documentation is needed, and will return the set to the Contractor.
2. Final Submittal:
a. Paper Copy: Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints that have been revised to address Architect’s comments from the initial submittal.
b. Digital Data Files: Submit digital data files of Project Record Drawings as PDF files on a thumb-drive.
220
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 017839 – 2 of 4
1.4 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Drawings: Maintain one set of paper copies of the Contract Drawings during the construction period for Project Record Drawing Purposes.
1. Project Record Drawing print sets shall include all drawings of the Contract Documents including original project Drawings, Shop Drawings, Supplemental Drawings, Coordination Drawings, Clarification Drawings, Change Orders, and similar drawings. Record Drawing set shall include all drawings of Contract Documents whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.
2. Store Project Record Drawings in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction; do not use Project Record Drawings for construction purposes.
3. Maintain Record Drawings in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss.
4. Provide access to Project Record Drawings for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
5. Incorporate new and revised drawings into Project Record Drawings as modifications are issued; do not wait until the end of Project.
6. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.
7. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 221
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 017839 – 3 of 4
8. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.
9. Mark record prints with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
10. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.
11. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.
1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction.
Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
C. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit marked-up record prints to Architect, following Architect’s review and action, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1. Format: PDF electronic file.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings in PDF format for use in recording information. a. Refer to Division 01 Section 011105 "Use of Architect’s Electronic Files” for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.
D. Format:
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
2. Record Digital Data Files:
a. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file.
b. Organize digital data information into separate electronic files corresponding with each building design discipline of the Contract Documents; name each file with the corresponding design discipline. 222
22-12479 – Ph 2 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 017839 – 4 of 4 E. Identification: Include the following information on each Record Drawing:
1. "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" designation located in a prominent location.
2. Project name if Project name is not included in a title block as part of the drawing.
3. Date.
4. Name of Architect if Architect’s name is not included in a title block as part of the drawing.
5. Name of Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
223
22-12479 – Ph 2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 – 1 of 2 SECTION 017900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel in demonstration and training of operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for operation and maintenance manuals and data.
2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Training materials in addition to Operation and Maintenance manuals required in Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data.”
B. Instruction Program Schedule: Submit outline schedule of instructional program that includes and coordinates programs for all products, equipment, and systems requiring demonstration and training. Schedule shall include a list of training sessions, proposed dates, times, length of instruction time.
1. Schedule shall be coordinated and finalized with the Owner.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training of Owner’s personnel.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner, adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.
224
22-12479 – Ph 2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 – 2 of 2 B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training with content of approved operation and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
1.6 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING
A. Training Location: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place.
B. Training Reference Material: Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. a. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
D. Instruction and Training: Instruct and train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Engage qualified instructors to instruct and train Owner's personnel.
2. At the conclusion of each training session, instructor shall test each participant’s understanding of instruction and training by observing participant’s demonstration of starting, stopping, and adjusting equipment as applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION – (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
225
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, CGBSC 018113 - 1 of 5 SECTION 018113
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, CGBSC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with the 2019 California Green Building Standards Code (CGBSC).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Sustainable Design Requirement submittals as required by Division 02 through 33 Specification Sections. Submittals may include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Construction Waste Management Plan and other submittals as required by Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
2. Air Quality: Product data for filtration media.
3. Product data for adhesives, sealants, and coatings indicating VOC content of each product used.
4. Product data for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Sustainable design requirements shall include, but not be limited, to the following requirements of the California Green Building Standards Code.
B. Outdoor Lighting: Outdoor lighting shall be designed and installed to comply with requirements of the CGBSC, Section 5.106.8.
C. Energy Efficiency: Comply with requirements of the California Energy Code and as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Plumbing Fixtures: Plumbing Fixtures shall comply with requirements of the CGBSC, Section 5.303.3.
E. Moisture Control: Irrigation systems shall be designed and installed to prevent spray on buildings; per requirements of the CGBSC, Section 5.407.2.1. 226
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, CGBSC 018113 - 2 of 5 F. Construction Waste Management: Comply with requirements of the CGBSC, Section
5.408.1 and Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management and Disposal.” Construction Waste Management shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Construction Waste Management Plan.
2. Recycling, reuse, and/or salvaging non-hazardous construction waste.
G. Environmental Quality/Pollutant Control: Comply with requirements of the CGBSC Sections as follows:
1. Section 5.504.3, Covering of Duct Openings and Protection of Mechanical equipment. At the time of rough installation and during storage on the construction site until final startup of the heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, all duct and other related air distribution component openings shall be covered with tape, plastic, sheet metal or other methods acceptable to the enforcing agency to reduce the amount of dust, water and debris which may enter the system.
2. Section 5.504.4.1, Adhesives and Sealants: Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following VOC content limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Adhesives: CGBSC Table 5.504.4.1 Adhesive VOC Limit:
1) Indoor Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.
2) Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
3) Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
4) Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
5) Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
6) Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
7) VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
8) Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
9) Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
10) Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
11) Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
12) Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L.
13) Other Adhesives not specifically listed: 50 g/L.
14) PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
15) CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.
16) ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.
17) Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.
18) Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.
19) Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
20) Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine-covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, rubber, or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250 g/L. 21) Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
22) Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.
23) Metal-to-Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
24) Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
25) Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L. 26) Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
227
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, CGBSC 018113 - 3 of 5 27) Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
b. Sealants: CGBSC Table 5.504.4.2, Sealant VOC Limit:
1) Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2) Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
3) Paving Sealants: 250 g/L.
4) Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
5) Other Sealants: 420 g/L.
6) Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
7) Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
8) Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
9) Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.
3. Section 5.504.4.3, Paints and Coatings: Architectural Coatings shall comply with the following VOC content limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Paints and Coatings: CGBSC Table 5.504.4.3, VOC Content Limits for Architectural Coatings:
1) Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2) Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 3) Nonflat High-Gloss Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 4) Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
5) Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
6) Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L. 7) Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 8) Rust Preventative Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
9) Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
10) Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
11) Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
12) Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 275 g/L. 13) Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 275 g/L. 14) Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L.
4. Section 5.504.4.3.1, Aerosol Paints and Coatings: Aerosol paints and coatings shall meet the PWMIR Limits for ROC in Section 94522(a)(3) and other requirements, including prohibitions on use of certain toxic compounds and ozone depleting substances, in Sections 94522(c)(2) and (d)(2) of California Code of Regulations, Title 17, commencing with Section 94520; and in areas under the jurisdiction of the Bay Area Air Quality Management District additionally comply with the percent VOC by weight of product limits of Regulation 8 Rule 49. Comply with requirements of 2019 CGBSC, Table 5.504.4.3.
228
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, CGBSC 018113 - 4 of 5 H. Carpet Systems: Comply with requirements of CGBSC, Section 5.504.4.4.
1. All carpet installed in the building interior shall meet the requirements of California Department of Public Health, “Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers,” Version 1.2, January 2017 (Emissions testing method for California Specification 01350).
a. See California Department of Public Health’s website for certification programs and testing labs.
2. Carpet Adhesive: VOC content not exceeding 50 g/L per CGBSC Table 5.504.4.1 when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) I. Composite Wood Products: Comply with requirements of CGBSC Section 5.504.4.5; hardwood plywood, particleboard, and medium density fiberboard composite wood products used on the interior or exterior of the building shall meet the requirements for formaldehyde as specified in ARB’s Air Toxics Control Measure (ATCM) for Composite Wood (17 CCR 93120 et seq.) Those materials not exempted by the ATCM must meet the specified emission limits, as shown in CGBSC Table 5.504.4.5.
J. Resilient Flooring Systems: Comply with requirements CGBSC, Section 5.504.4.6.
1. Where resilient flooring is installed, at least 80% of floor area receiving resilient flooring shall meet the requirements of California Department of Public Health, “Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers,” Version 1.2, January 2017 (Emissions testing method for California Specification 01350). a. See California Department of Public Health’s website for certification programs and testing labs.
2. Resilient Floor Adhesive: VOC content not exceeding 50 g/L per CGBSC Table
5.504.4.1 when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) K. HVAC Filters: Comply with requirements CGBSC, Section 5.504.5.3; in mechanically ventilated buildings, provide regularly occupied areas of the building with air filtration media for outside and return air prior to occupancy that provides at least a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 13. MERV 13 filters shall be installed prior to occupancy and recommendations for maintenance with filters of the same value shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual.
1. Exception: Existing mechanical equipment.
2. Labeling: Installed filters shall be clearly labeled by the manufacturer indicating the MERV rating.
L. Outside Air Delivery: Comply with requirements CGBSC, Section 5.506.1; for mechanically or naturally ventilated spaces in buildings, meet the minimum requirements of Section 120.1 (Requirements For Ventilation) of the 2019 California Energy Code, or the applicable local code, whichever is more stringent, and Division 1, Chapter 4 of CCR, Title 8.
229
22-12479 – Ph 2 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, CGBSC 018113 - 5 of 5 M. Acoustical Control: Comply with requirements CGBSC, Section 5.507.4, employ building assemblies and components with Sound Transmission Class (STC) values determined in accordance with ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413 or Outdoor–Indoor Sound Transmission Class (OITC) determined in accordance with ASTM E 1332, using either the prescriptive or performance method in CGBSC Section 5.507.4.1 or 5.507.4.2.
1. Exception:
a. Buildings with few or no occupants or where occupants are not likely to be affected by exterior noise, as determined by the enforcement authority, such as factories, stadiums, storage, enclosed parking structures and utility buildings.
b. Exception: For public schools and community colleges, the requirements of CGBSC Section 5.507.4, and all subsections, apply only to new construction.
N. Interior Sound Transmission: Comply with requirements CGBSC, Section 5.507.4.3; wall and floor-ceiling assemblies separating tenant spaces and tenant spaces and public places shall have an STC of at least 40.
O. Ozone Depletion and Greenhouse Gas Reductions: Comply with requirements CGBSC, Section 5.508.1; installation of HVAC, refrigeration, and fire suppression equipment shall comply with CGBSC Sections 5.508.1.1 and 5.508.1.2.
1. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs): Install HVAC, refrigeration and fire suppression equipment that do not contain CFCs.
2. Halons: Install HVAC, refrigeration and fire suppression equipment that do not contain Halons.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION - (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
230
22-12479 Ph 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 of 6
SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures, and for protection of existing construction.
3. Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” for salvaging, recycling, and disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage to Owner: Detach item from existing construction in a manner to prevent damage and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C. Remove and Salvage for Reinstallation: Detach item from existing construction in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and securely store item until it is to be reinstalled at locations indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items or improvements that are to remain and not be removed. Existing items to remain shall be protected from damage during the course of construction.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 231
22-12479 Ph 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 of 6
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
C. Hazardous Materials: It is expected that hazardous materials will not be encountered in the Work.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.
D. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
232
22-12479 Ph 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 of 6
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
1. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements are encountered and found to be in conflict with intended function or design, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.
2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 233
22-12479 Ph 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 of 6
B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
C. Protection of Existing Construction: Protect existing construction to remain with temporary protections and construction. Do not remove existing construction unless otherwise indicated.
D. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.
3.4 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off utilities with Owner and/or utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.
234
22-12479 Ph 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 of 6
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.
Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use plasma or flame cutting torches without written approval from Architect. Where allowed, clear area of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch during and for at least two hours after flame-cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
6. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
7. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly, comply with requirements of Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management and Disposal.” B. Minor Accessories and Fixtures: Remove minor accessories and fixtures as required to accommodate removal of existing finishes or application new finishes whether items are indicated to be removed or not.
1. Minor accessories and fixtures shall include but not be limited to toilet room accessories; classroom accessories such as pencil sharpeners coat hooks, flag holders, and similar items.
2. Where new replacement items are not indicated or specified in other sections, minor accessories and fixtures shall be considered to be items to be removed and reinstalled.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 235
22-12479 Ph 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6 of 6
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
1. Items removed, salvaged, and reinstalled for the Contractor’s convenience shall be considered the same as items to be removed and salvaged for reinstallation.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Recycle or dispose demolition waste materials according to Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in accordance with local regulations and in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION
236
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 1 of 10 SECTION 033543
POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polished concrete finishing of existing concrete slabs including grinding, honing, scoring, staining, and sealing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-Place Concrete" for concrete not designated as polished or stained concrete.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review and discuss the following:
a. Construction joints.
b. Concrete repair procedures.
c. Concrete finishing.
d. Protection of polished concrete.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product incorporated into the Work, include product data, application instructions and VOC content for liquid products.
B. Polishing Schedule: Submit plan showing polished concrete surfaces and schedule of polishing operations for each area of polished concrete before start of polishing operations. Include locations of all joints, including construction joints.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product requiring color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed color. 237
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 2 of 10 E. Field Quality Control Reports: for dynamic and static coefficient of friction test reports.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For instructions to include in maintenance documentation.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity experienced in performing work similar in design, products, and extent to the scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance for not less than 3 years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce specified work.
B. Walkway Auditor: Certified by CPAA or NFSI to test bonded abrasive polished concrete floors for dynamic and static coefficient of friction according to ANSI B 101.1 and B 101.3.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Demonstrate curing, finishing, and protecting of polished concrete.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any.
B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well- ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity which complies with manufacturer’s written instructions. 238
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 3 of 10
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply floor system within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply products to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 65 deg F, or above 85 deg F.
B. Protection Prior to Polishing Concrete: Protect concrete floor areas to be polished as follows prior to finishing:
1. Prohibit use of markers, spray paint, and soapstone.
2. Prohibit improper application of liquid membrane film forming curing compounds.
3. Prohibit vehicle parking over concrete surfaces.
4. Prohibit pipe-cutting operations over concrete surfaces.
5. Prohibit storage of any items over concrete surfaces for not less than 28 days after concrete placement.
6. Prohibit ferrous metals storage over concrete surfaces.
7. Protect from petroleum, oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquid dripping from equipment working over concrete surfaces.
8. Protect from acids and acidic detergents contacting concrete surfaces.
9. Protect from painting activities over concrete surfaces.
C. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 85 deg F.
D. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring installation.
E. Close spaces to traffic during application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
F. Control and collect dust produced by grinding operations. Protect adjacent construction from detrimental effects of grinding operations.
1. Provide dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust migration and to isolate areas from noise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Material Compatibility: Provide liquid floor treatment materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 239
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 4 of 10 B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide liquid floor treatment products by one of the following manufacturers:
1. Advanced Floor Products.
2. Ardex Americas.
3. BASF Construction Chemicals.
4. Lythic/Solomon Colors Inc.
5. PROSOCO.
6. Sika/Scofield.
C. Product Source Requirements: Obtain liquid floor treatment products from a single source from a single manufacturer.
D. VOC Content of Liquid Products: In compliance with the California Green Building Standards Code.
E. Liquid Densifier: Clear, waterborne, odorless inorganic aqueous solution of silicon dioxide and proprietary components dissolved in lithium silicate hydroxide that penetrates into the concrete surface and reacts with the calcium hydroxide to provide a permanent chemical reaction that hardens and densifies the wear surface of the cementitious portion of the concrete and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces.
F. Dye: Translucent, non-film forming micronized water borne or acetone dye of soluble colorant dissolved in a carrier designed to penetrate and alter coloration of concrete floor surface.
1. Acid stains are not acceptable.
G. Wear Protection: Lithium fortified stain and wear protection finish for deep penetration, increased surface hardness and superior reflectivity on concrete.
H. Surface Cleaner: Water based surface cleaner as recommended by liquid floor treatment manufacturer.
1. pH Level: 10.0 pH, non-hazardous waste per EPA requirements.
I. Additional Liquid Floor Treatment Products: Products as recommended in writing by liquid floor treatment manufacturer and concrete polishing contractor.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide accessory materials as recommended in writing by liquid floor treatment product manufacturer.
B. Repair Material: A cementitious product that is designed for repairing cracks and surface imperfections in concrete substrates. The repair material shall have sufficient bonding capabilities to remain adhered to concreter substrates after polishing operations, and to provide abrasion resistance equal to or greater than the surrounding concrete substrate. Repair materials shall be compatible with liquid applied products. 240
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 5 of 10 C. Grout Material: A thin mortar for filling spaces, provide one of the following:
1. Epoxy, urethane, polyurea, or polyaspartic resins.
2. Latex or acrylic binders mixed with cement dust from previous grinding steps.
3. Silicate binders mixed with cement dust from previous grinding steps.
D. Joint Filler: A semi-rigid polyurea joint sealant with 100% solids.
1. Acceptable Product: Metger/McGuire; Spal-Pro RS 65 or approved equivalent.
2. Color: Clear.
3. Hardness: Shore A at 70 Deg. F, ASTM D 2240, Results A64-69.
4. Tensile Elongation: 162% at 70 Deg. F, ASTM D 412.
5. Tensile Strength: 393 psi at 70 Deg. F, ASTM D 412.
2.3 POLISHING EQUIPMENT
A. Field Grinding and Polishing Equipment:
1. General: A multiple head, counter rotating, walk behind or ride on machine, of various size and weights, with diamond tooling affixed to the head for the purpose of grinding concrete. Excludes janitorial maintenance equipment.
2. Dry Grinding Equipment: If dry grinding, honing, or polishing; use dust extraction equipment with flow rate suitable for dust generated, with squeegee attachments to meet OSHA requirements.
3. Wet Grinding Equipment: If wet grinding, honing, or polishing; use slurry extraction equipment suitable for slurry removal and containment prior to proper disposal.
B. Edge Grinding and Polishing Equipment: Hand-held or walk-behind machines which produces the same results, without noticeable differences, as field grinding and polishing equipment.
C. Burnishing Equipment: High speed walk-behind or ride-on machines capable of generating 1000 to 2000 revolutions per minute and with sufficient head pressure of not less than 20 pounds to raise floor temperature by 20 degrees F.
D. Diamond Tooling: Abrasive tools that contain industrial grade diamonds within a bonded matrix (such as metallic, resinous, ceramic, etc) that are attached to rotating heads to refine the concrete substrate.
1. Bonded Abrasive: Abrasive medium that is held within a bonding that erodes away to expose new abrasive medium as it is used.
2. Metal Bond Tooling: Diamond tooling that contains industrial grade diamonds with a metallic bonded matrix that is attached to rotating heads to refine the concrete substrate. These tools are available in levels of soft, medium, and hard metallic matrices that are matched with contrasting concrete substrates (i.e. hard matrix/soft concrete, medium matrix/medium concrete, soft matrix/hard concrete) and are typically used in the grinding and early honing stages of the polishing process.
241
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 6 of 10
3. Resin Bond Tooling: Diamond tooling that contains industrial grade diamonds within a resinous bonded matrix (poly-phenolic, ester-phenolic, and thermoplastic-phenolic) that is attached to rotating heads to refine the concrete substrate. Resin bond tooling does not have the soft/medium/hard characteristics of metal bond tooling and are typically used for the later honing and polishing stages of the polishing process.
4. Hybrid Tooling: Diamond tooling that combines metal bond and resin bond that has the characteristics of both types of tooling. These types of tools are typically used as either transitional tooling from metal bond tools to resin bond tools or as a first cut tool on smooth concrete surfaces.
5. Transitional Tooling: Diamond tooling that is used to refine the scratch pattern of metal bond tooling prior to the application of resin bond tooling in an effort to extend the life of resin bond tooling and to create a better foundation for the polishing process.
6. Abrasive Pad: An abrasive pad, resembling a typical floor maintenance burnishing pad that has the capability of refining the concrete surface on a microscopic level that may or may not contain industrial grade diamonds. These pads are typically used for the maintenance and/or restoration of previously installed polished concrete flooring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Before applying finish system, clean and prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove projections, fill voids, and seal joints if any, as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Repair concrete substrates to comply with requirements for concrete staining and polishing.
B. Schedule preparation work so dust and other contaminants from process do not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
C. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving coatings to prevent overspray, spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings. Prevent coating materials from entering substrate penetrations and clogging weep holes and drains.
242
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 7 of 10 D. Protect other work from dust generated by grinding operations. Control dust to prevent air pollution and comply with environmental protection regulations.
1. Erect and maintain temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit dust migration and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions during installation.
E. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film forming coatings from concrete.
F. Mechanically abrade concrete substrates by methods and with equipment recommended by floor system manufacturer. Grinding and polishing equipment shall be connected to a dust collection apparatus.
3.3 CONCRETE SUBSTRATE REPAIR
A. Cracks: Crack repair shall be completed after the first grinding and floor cleaning; comply with flooring system manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Spalls: Spall repair shall be completed after the first grinding and floor cleaning or prior to the beginning of the floor system process installation; comply with flooring system manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.4 JOINT FILLING
A. Joint Filling: Prepare joints and install joint filling materials in accordance with joint filler manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. Joint filler shall not be installed in newly placed concrete slabs until slabs have cured not less than 30 days.
2. Joints shall be filled after the first grinding pass and floor cleaning before any subsequent grinding passes.
3. Fill joints in one pass, 1/2 inch deep over closed cell compressible backer rod.
3.5 POLISHING
A. General: Use grinding and polishing steps and grits as recommended in writing by floor system manufacturer to achieve the desired level of cut and level of gloss and to match accepted mockup.
1. Perform all polishing procedures to ensure a consistent visual appearance from wall to wall.
2. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations.
3. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.
4. Apply dyes, densifiers and finish treatments between grinding/polishing/burnishing operations and at rates recommended in writing by flooring system manufacturer.
243
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 8 of 10
5. Polished edge work shall be done with hand held or walk behind equipment and shall be finished to a level matching the field of the floor system.
B. Initial Grinding:
1. Use grinding equipment with metal or semi-metal bonded tooling.
2. Begin grinding in one direction using sufficient size equipment and diamond tooling to meet specified aggregate exposure class.
3. Make sequential passes with each pass perpendicular to previous pass using finer grit tool with each pass, limit change in grit values to not more than double the grit value of the previous pass.
4. Achieve maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit tools.
5. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust.
6. Continue grinding until aggregate surface exposure matches approved field mock-up.
C. Treating Surface Imperfections:
1. Mix patching compound or grout material with dust created by grinding operations, manufacturer’s tint, or sand to match color of adjacent concrete surfaces.
2. Fill surface imperfections including, but not limited to, holes, surface damage, small and micro cracks, air holes, pop-outs, and voids with grout to eliminate micro pitting in finished work.
3. Work compound and treatment until color differences between concrete surface and filled surface imperfections, compared to mockup, are not reasonably noticeable when viewed from 20 feet away under lighting conditions that will be present after construction.
D. Grout Grinding:
1. Use grinding equipment and appropriate grit and bond diamond tooling.
2. Apply grout, forced into the pore structure of the concrete substrate, to fill surface imperfections.
3. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust.
E. Honing:
1. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust.
2. Use grinding equipment with hybrid or resin bonded tooling.
3. Hone concrete in one direction starting with 120/140 grit tooling and increasing to 200 grit making as many sequential passes as required to remove scratches, each pass perpendicular to previous pass, reaching maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit tooling.
244
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 9 of 10
4. Apply colorants and densifiers in accordance with liquid floor treatment manufacturer’s written instructions.
5. Hone concrete in one direction with 400 grit tooling making as many sequential passes as required to remove scratches, each pass perpendicular to previous pass, reaching maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding.
F. Polishing:
1. Use polishing equipment with resin-bonded tooling.
2. Begin polishing in one direction starting with 800 grit tooling.
3. Make sequential passes with each pass perpendicular to previous pass using finer grit tooling with each pass until the specified level of appearance has been achieved.
4. Achieve maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit pads.
5. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust.
6. Apply wear protection products in accordance with liquid floor treatment manufacturer’s written instructions. Final film thickness should be less than .05 mils after cure.
7. Achieve final polish using burnishing equipment and finest grit abrasive pads, burnish to uniform reflective sheen matching approved field mock-up.
3.6 COLORING CONCRETE FLOORS
A. Colorant Application:
1. Auto scrub the surface completely clean and remove any remaining dust. Allow the surface to dry completely before application of colorant.
2. Apply using methods and techniques required by manufacturer to produce finish matching approved field mock-ups. Sequence installation with honing / polishing / burnishing and allow to dry in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations before proceeding. Apply dye immediately prior to final honing step, unless otherwise indicated by the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Maintain wet edge, working newly applied solution into edges of adjacent wet edges of previously treated surfaces.
4. Maintain consistent saturation throughout application. Apply colorant to rejection.
5. Avoid splashing, dripping, or puddling of solution on adjacent substrates.
6. Remove all rejected dye from the surface using an auto scrubber.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Provide field quality control testing confirming compliance with specified performance criteria.
1. Slip Resistance: Measure slip resistance using a BOT-3000 Slip-tester, ensure compliance with slip resistance rating.
245
22-12479 – Ph 2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 10 of 10
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of polished floor system.
1. Protect from spills and contamination.
2. Avoid moisture for not less than 72 hours after completion of floor finish system.
3. Limit pedestrian traffic for not less than24 hours after completion and not less than 7 days for other traffic.
B. Remove grinding dust from installation and adjacent areas. Clean surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure that polished flooring is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.9 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH LEVEL
A. Polish concrete floors to achieve the following finish:
1. Coefficient of Friction: Achieve the following coefficient of friction values for level floor surfaces:
a. Static Coefficient of Friction: 0.42 minimum, ANSI B 101.1. b. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: 0.35 minimum, ANSI B 101.3.
1. Aggregate Exposure: Class B, Fine/Sand Aggregate Finish. Surface exposure of 85 to 95% fine aggregate and 5 to 15% cement fines and coarse aggregate based on visual observation of the overall area of the polished floor.
2. Gloss Level: Level 1, flat gloss/matte finish, 100 grit.
END OF SECTION
246
22-12479 – Ph 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 of 8
SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with timber.
3. Wood blocking and nailers.
4. Plywood backing panels for telecommunications equipment.
5. Wood furring
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 Section “Plywood Panel Sheathing” for structural use panel sheathing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.
C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
D. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
247
22-12479 – Ph 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 of 8
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
1.5 REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS
A. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code, 2019 Edition.
B. American Wood Council (AWC):
1. National Design Specification for Wood Construction with commentary, (ANSI/AWC NDS-2018).
2. Special Design Provisions for Wind and Seismic with commentary, (ANSI/AWC SDPWS-2015).
C. Lumber grading agencies and abbreviations:
1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stockpile materials sufficiently in advance of need to assure their availability in a timely manner for Work.
B. Use extreme care in off-loading of lumber to prevent damage, splitting, and breaking of materials.
C. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
D. Identify framing lumber by grade and store each grade separately from other grades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 248
22-12479 – Ph 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 of 8
B. Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent maximum unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2, for interior construction not in contact with ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar members in contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
4. Wood plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Framing Lumber; Studs, Joists, and Rafters: Douglas Fir, WCLIB or WWPA, No. 1 or better, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.4 TIMBER FRAMING
A. Timber Framing: Douglas Fir, WCLIB or WWPA, No. 1 or better, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C (‘A’ face exposed to room), 3/4 inch nominal thickness.
1. Equipment backing panels to be finished with intumescent paint specified in Division 09 Section Painting or shall panels shall fire retardant treated plywood. 249
22-12479 – Ph 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 of 8
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber as indicated on Drawings, as required for project conditions, and as required for support or attachment of other construction, including but not limited to blocking, nailers, support curbs, and furring.
B. Dimension Lumber Items: Provide lumber of species and grade matching framing lumber.
1. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility or Stud grade lumber may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
2. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
C. Boards: Provide lumber of 19 percent maximum moisture content (S-DRY).
1. Exposed Boards: Where boards will not be concealed by other work or where painted finish is indicated, provide Select Merchantable Boards per WCLIP rules.
2. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide any species graded construction boards or WCLIP No. 1 or better.
D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Fasteners in contact with preservative treated wood, including nuts and washers, shall be of hot dipped galvanized steel, stainless steel, or silicon bronze; the coating weights for zinc-coated fasteners shall be in accordance with ASTM A 153.
Fasteners other than nails, timber rivets, wood screws, and lag screws shall be permitted to be of mechanically deposited zinc-coated steel with coating weights in accordance with ASTM B 695, Class 55 minimum; comply with requirements of 2019 CBC 2304.10.5.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
250
22-12479 – Ph 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 of 8
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Post Installed Concrete Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials; manufacturer, size, and type as indicated on Drawings. Materials to comply with the following:
1. Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND HARDWARE
A. General: Connectors in contact with preservative treated or fire retardant treated wood shall be of hot dipped galvanized steel or stainless steel; the coating weights for zinc- coated connectors shall be in accordance with ASTM A 153; comply with requirements of 2019 CBC 2304.10.5.
B. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Provide products as indicated on Drawings manufactured by the following:
1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
C. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3- iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.
251
22-12479 – Ph 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6 of 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install framing as indicated on drawings, as herein specified, and as required to comply with regulatory agencies and American Forest and Paper Association (AF&PA) document WCD 1 "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction". Notes and details on Drawings shall take precedence over these specifications.
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
D. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches on center.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities in accordance with 2019 2022 CBC Section 718 “Concealed Spaces” and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches on center with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches on center Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. 252
22-12479 – Ph 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7 of 8
J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated on Drawings and complying with the following:
1. ICC ESR-1539 for power-driven staples and nails.
2. 2019 CBC Table 2304.10.1 “Fastening Schedule.”
K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
L. Fasteners and connectors in contact with preservative treated or fire retardant treated wood shall be corrosion resistant as specified under Part 2 product requirements.
3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide studs, top and bottom plates of sizes indicated on Drawings, 2 inch minimum nominal thickness.
1. Studs: Members of size and spacing indicated on Drawings.
2. Top Plates: Double top plate of width equal that of studs.
3. Bottom Plates: Single bottom plate of width equal that of studs; fasten plates to supporting construction as indicated on Drawings.
4. Mid-Height Blocking: Provide continuous horizontal blocking at mid-height of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as studs.
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs.
C. Frame openings as indicated on Drawings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on double- jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated.
253
22-12479 – Ph 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 8 of 8
3.4 CEILING JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling Joist Framing: Install ceiling joists as indicated on Drawings with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.
1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail short joist to ends of rafters and to top plate, and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps.
Provide 2-by-4-inch nominal size stringers spaced 48 inches on center crosswise over main ceiling joists.
3.5 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Install timber beams with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members, unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports as indicated if not continuous.
B. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Use all necessary means to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to, the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION
254
22-12479 – Ph 2 PLYWOOD PANEL SHEATHING 061600 - 1 of 2 SECTION 061600
PLYWOOD PANEL SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous plywood sheathing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood equipment backing panels.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLYWOOD SHEATHING, ROOF AND/OR WALLS
A. Plywood Sheathing: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, structural sheathing unless otherwise indicated.
1. Span Rating: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Fasteners used for the attachment of exterior roof and/or wall sheathing, and fasteners in contact with preservative treated or fire retardant treated wood, including nuts and washers, shall be of hot dipped galvanized steel, stainless 255
22-12479 – Ph 2 PLYWOOD PANEL SHEATHING 061600 - 2 of 2 steel, or silicon bronze; the coating weights for zinc-coated fasteners shall be in accordance with ASTM A 153. The coating weights for mechanically deposited zinc-coated steel fasteners shall be in accordance with ASTM B 695, Class 55 minimum. Comply with requirements of 2019 CBC 2304.10.1 and 2304.10.5.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
D. Screws for Fastening Sheathing to Wood Framing: ANSI/ASME B18.6.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
C. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.
E. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.
F. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
G. Fastening: Securely fasten panels to framing by fastening as indicated on Drawings complying with the following:
1. Wood Framing: Comply with the following:
a. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
b. 2019 California Building Code, Table 2304.10.1 “Fastening Schedule.” c. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections.
Install fasteners without splitting wood.
END OF SECTION
256
22-12479 Ph 2 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1 of 4 SECTION 066400
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board.”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include installation instructions; product data for panels, trim, and adhesive; and VOC content and chemical components for adhesives and sealants.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) SHEET PANELING
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer.
257
22-12479 Ph 2 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2 of 4 B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels: Plastic panels complying with ASTM D 3841 comprised of thermosetting styrenated and acrylated polyester resins reinforced with glass fibers.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Kemlite Company Inc.
b. Marlite.
c. Nudo Products, Inc.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch.
3. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture.
4. Panels shall be USDA accepted for incidental food contact.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of not less than six colors.
6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Class C as determined according to ASTM E 84 by UL or another acceptable qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 76-200.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.
1. Color: Match panels.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.
1. VOC Content: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
258
22-12479 Ph 2 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove wall coverings, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond.
B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.
D. Condition panels and trim by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels.
1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory or panel joint locations for accurate installation.
2. Locate trim accessories and panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install panels at locations indicated with vertical edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.
1. Install panels vertically without horizontal joints unless distance is greater than the maximum available panel length. Where horizontal joints cannot be avoided, provide H-shaped trim between panels.
C. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
D. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails; do not fasten through panels. 259
22-12479 Ph 2 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 4 of 4 E. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.
F. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
G. Remove excess sealant and smears as panels are installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean panel faces to remove soiling, stains, dust, and dirt using clean rags and cleaning agents as instructed by panel manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
260
22-12479 – Ph 2 BLANKET INSULATION 072116 - 1 of 5
SECTION 072116
BLANKET INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Glass fiber batt/blanket insulation for thermal and acoustical insulation installed in framing cavities.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Mechanical Sections as applicable to air distribution duct systems for insulation for ducts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of insulation and accessory.
B. Installer's Certification: Listing type, manufacturer, and R-value of insulation installed in each element of the building thermal envelope.
1. Sign, date, and post the certification in a conspicuous location on Project site.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 261
22-12479 – Ph 2 BLANKET INSULATION 072116 - 2 of 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass.
5. Owens-Corning.
C. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
D. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation, Reinforced-Foil-Faced: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.
E. Thermal Resistance Values and Thicknesses: Where Drawings indicate thermal resistance values, provide units of the following nominal equivalent thicknesses:
1. R-13; 3-1/2 inch thickness.
2. R-19; 6 inch thickness.
3. R-25; 8 inch thickness.
4. R-30; 10 inch thickness.
5. R-38; 12 inch thickness.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory materials shall be as recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer.
B. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.
262
22-12479 – Ph 2 BLANKET INSULATION 072116 - 3 of 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in cavities formed by framing members in compliance with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.
B. Install insulation to provide a complete thermal envelope between the interior and exterior of the building and between conditioned and unconditioned interior spaces.
1. Provide insulation having thermal resistance values indicated on drawings, but not less than the following:
a. Walls: R-19.
b. Rafter Spaces and Ceilings: R-30.
2. Seal joints and fill gaps and voids in insulation using the following materials:
a. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Seal joints and fill gaps, voids, and spaces around door and window frames with spray polyurethane insulation; apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where it is not feasible to use spray polyurethane insulation; compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
C. Install insulation types according to the following:
1. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Install vapor-retarder faced insulation at locations indicated below; install with vapor-retarder membrane to the climate conditioned side of framing.
a. Exterior Walls: Install vapor retarder faced insulation in stud wall cavities of exterior walls.
b. Interior Walls: Install vapor retarder faced insulation in stud wall cavities of interior walls between conditioned and unconditioned spaces.
263
22-12479 – Ph 2 BLANKET INSULATION 072116 - 4 of 5
c. Rafters: Install vapor retarder faced insulation in framing cavities between rafters.
2. Unfaced Blankets: Install in the following locations:
a. Interior Walls: Stud wall cavities of interior walls between conditioned interior spaces for acoustical insulation at locations indicated on the Drawings, thickness of insulation to match stud width.
b. Ceilings:
1) Thermal Applications: Install unfaced insulation over gypsum board ceilings having an unconditioned vented attic space above.
2) Acoustical Applications: Install unfaced insulation over ceilings at locations indicated on Drawings.
D. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
E. Install vapor barrier faced thermal insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed.
F. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
G. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
H. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
I. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
J. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
K. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 using faced blankets having stapling flanges; lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.
L. Vapor Retarder Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
M. Water-Piping in Walls: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.
264
22-12479 – Ph 2 BLANKET INSULATION 072116 - 5 of 5
N. Use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, moisture, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
265
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 1 of 13 SECTION 074113
STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Architectural standing-seam metal roof panels.
2. Metal roof panel accessories.
3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment.
4. Miscellaneous metal framing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field- or shop- formed fasciae, copings, flashings, roof drainage systems, and other sheet metal work not part of metal roof panel assemblies.
2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants not otherwise specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, metal roof panel Installer, metal roof panel manufacturer's representative, substrate Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal roof panels including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
266
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 2 of 13
4. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.
5. Review structural loading limitations of substrate during and after roofing.
6. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof panel assembly during and after installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after metal roof panel installation.
10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of roof panel and accessory.
B. SDS Sheets: For each type of product indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details specific to project. Indicate point of fixity of metal panels. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.
D. Accessory Details: Include details of the following items:
1. Flashing and trim.
2. Roof curbs.
3. Pipe penetration flashings.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer's technical representative.
1. Submit Installer qualifications in the form of an original letter on manufacturer's letterhead signed by authorized manufacturer representative.
B. Material Certificates: For thermal insulation, from manufacturer.
C. Field Quality Control Reports.
D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals. 267
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 3 of 13
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years' experience installing similar work, able to communicate verbally with Contractor, Architect, and employees, and qualified by the manufacturer to furnish warranty of type specified.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized full-time employee representative of manufacturer experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roof panel system and qualified to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this Project.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.
E. Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication.
268
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 4 of 13
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of substrate, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Roof System Manufacturer's standard form in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period, as follows.
1. Form of Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty form.
2. Scope of Warranty: Work of this Section and including sheet metal details and termination details installed by the roof system Installer and approved by the Roof System Manufacturer.
3. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of completion.
B. Installer Warranty: Installer's warranty signed by Installer, as follows.
1. Form of Warranty: Form acceptable to Roofing Manufacturer and Owner.
2. Scope of Warranty: Work of this Section.
3. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of completion.
C. Manufacturer Inspection and Preventive Maintenance Service: To report maintenance responsibilities necessary for preservation of Owner's warranty rights and to perform periodic routine maintenance required, as described in Manufacturer's standard form.
The cost of manufacturer's inspections and preventive maintenance is included in the Contract Sum.
1. Scope of Service: Manufacturer's standard form.
2. Inspections to occur in following years: 2, 5, 10, 15 following completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
269
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 5 of 13 C. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.
1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.
E. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than the following when tested according to ASTM E 1680, based upon 16 inch wide panel:
1. Maximum 0.005 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area at test-pressure difference of 1.57lbf/sq. ft.
F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 12.00 lbf/sq. ft..
G. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.
H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners, and accessory materials for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer or from manufacturers approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer: In other “Part 2 - Products” Articles where named manufacturer products are indicated by “Basis of Design,” Design, Drawings and Specifications are based on products by the following:
1. Tremco, Inc.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated or submit request for substitution per Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures.”
2.3 ARCHITECTURAL STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and 270
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 6 of 13 mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.
B. Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Factory-formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Tremco, Inc., TremLock VP.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 50, prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M; structural quality.
a. Thickness: 0.0298-inch/22 ga. (0.86-mm).
b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
c. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 2-Coat Fluoropolymer.
d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Clips: Low-movement floating clips to accommodate thermal movement; fixed where design permits.
a. Material: 0.064-inch nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.
4. Joint Type: Field mechanically seamed 180 deg.
5. Panel Shape: Flat.
6. Panel Pan Configuration: Flat pan.
7. Panel Seam Height and Coverage: 1-1/2 inch by 16 inches.
8. Eave Notch: Factory-formed.
2.4 ROOF PANEL SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Panel System Accessories, General: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.
2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.
271
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 7 of 13 B. Panel Sealants: Provide one of the following identical to that used in test panels meeting performance requirements:
1. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311, with nylon spacer beads to prevent over compression of the sealant tape.
C. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.028 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, TremLock Sheet
D. Pipe Penetration Flashing: Premolded EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base and stainless steel pipe clamp to secure collar to pipe.
E. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from aluminum sheet, minimum 0.080 inch thick; with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles, and welded top box, integral internal fastener flange, and water diverter. Fabricate curb subframing of minimum 0.0598-inch thick, angle, C, or Z-shaped galvanized steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads, of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels.
1. Insulate roof curb with 1-inch thick, rigid insulation.
2.5 SELF-ADHERING SHEET UNDERLAYMENT
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: 40 mil thick polyethylene film laminated to layer of SBS rubberized asphalt adhesive; maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm (6 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); with slip-resisting surface and release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, AVC Membrane.
2. Thickness: 40 mils.
3. Permeance, maximum, ASTM E 96: 0.05 perms.
4. Tensile Strength, minimum, ASTM D2523: 25 lbf/in.
5. Elongation, minimum, ASTM D412: 250 percent.
6. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D1970: Unaffected, -32 deg. C.
7. Adhesion to Plywood, ASTM D903: 6 lbf/in.
2.6 COVER BOARD
A. Cover Board: Gypsum panel, glass-mat-faced, ASTM C1177/C1177M.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco/GP Gypsum DensDeck.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
272
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 8 of 13
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated.
B. Zee Clips: 0.079-inch nominal thickness.
C. Base or Sill Channels: 0.079-inch nominal thickness.
D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:
1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements, but not less than 0.025 inch.
2. Depth: As indicated.
E. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
1. Nominal Thickness: As indicated.
F. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end- welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
1. Site-rolled fabrication of panels or shop-rolling of panels using fixed equipment designed for site-rolling applications does not meet the requirements of this Section.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. 273
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 9 of 13 D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
3. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.10 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Steel Panels and Accessories:
1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.
2. Examine solid roof substrate to verify that substrate joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.
274
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 10 of 13
3. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation.
4. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment.
B. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller.
Cover underlayment within 14 days.
1. Apply over entire roof surface.
B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations.
B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one, and only one, location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners.
1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing.
2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement.
C. Install metal roof panels as follows:
1. Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. in presence of factory-authorized representative.
2. Field cutting of metal panels by torch or abrasive saw is not permitted.
3. Install panels perpendicular to supporting purlins.
275
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 11 of 13
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Provide metal closures at rake edges, rake walls, and each side of ridge and hip caps.
6. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings.
7. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.
D. Fasteners: Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
E. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.
F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
1. Use slip sheet where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3. Erection Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of splices and alignment of matching profiles.
4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
276
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 12 of 13
5. Watertight Installation:
a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight.
b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
c. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. Provide concealed fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1. Form trim and transition joints using compressed joints with captive butyl sealant capable of resisting static water pressure. Cleated joints and exposed joint sealants do not meet this requirement.
2. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
3. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
C. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels.
D. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. 277
22-12479 – Ph 2 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 13 of 13
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Technical Representative: Engage a qualified manufacturer's technical representative acceptable to Owner for a minimum of 4 full-time days on site to perform substrate examination, interim observations, and final roof inspections, and to prepare reports.
B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
278
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 1 of 13
SECTION 075416
SINGLE PLY ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adhered thermoplastic ketone ethylene ester (KEE) single ply roofing system on wood deck.
2. Cover board.
3. Fluid applied gutter restoration coating.
4. Metal Copings.
5. Walkway material.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 Section " Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers and blocking.
2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop-formed sheet metal items including roof drainage system items, roof penetration flashings, base and counterflashings and reglets.
3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 "Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing" and glossary in applicable edition of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review drawings and specifications.
3. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
279
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 2 of 13
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
5. Examine substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.
6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
9. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. SDS: For each type of product indicated.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, Manufacturer and Roofing Inspector.
1. Include letter from Manufacturer written for this Project indicating approval of Installer.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Executed copies of warranties.
B. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years' experience installing products comparable to those specified, able to communicate verbally with Contractor, Architect, and employees, and qualified by the manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and furnish warranty of type specified.
B. Roofing Inspector Qualifications: A technical representative of manufacturer experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system, qualified to perform roofing observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article, to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this Project, and approved by the manufacturer to issue warranty certification. The Roofing Inspector shall be an authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer. 280
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 3 of 13
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site access to manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Daily Protection: Coordinate installation of roofing so insulation and other components of roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing.
2. Remove temporary plugs from roof drains at end of each day.
3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Roof System Manufacturer's standard form in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period, as follows.
1. Form of Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty form. 281
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 4 of 13
2. Scope of Warranty: Work of this Section and including sheet metal details and termination details installed by the roof system Installer and approved by the Roof System Manufacturer.
3. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of completion.
B. Manufacturer Inspection and Preventive Maintenance Service: To report maintenance responsibilities necessary for preservation of Owner's warranty rights and to perform periodic routine maintenance required, as described in Manufacturer's standard form.
The cost of manufacturer's inspections and preventive maintenance is included in the Contract Sum.
1. Scope of Service: Manufacturer's standard form.
2. Inspections to occur in following years: 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 following completion.
C. Installer Warranty: Installer's warranty signed by Installer, as follows.
1. Form of Warranty: Form acceptable to Roofing Manufacturer and Owner.
2. Scope of Warranty: Work of this Section.
3. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 10,000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746/D3746M, ASTM D4272/D4272M, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470.
B. Flashings and Fastening: Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials and installation techniques that comply with requirements and recommendations of the following:
1. NRCA Roofing Manual (Sixth Edition) for construction details and recommendations.
2. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Seventh Edition) for construction details.
C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
282
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 5 of 13
D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
E. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.
F. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance index of not less than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-
1. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners, and accessory materials for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer or from manufacturers approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer: In other “Part 2 - Products” Articles where named manufacturer products are indicated by “Basis of Design,” Design, Drawings and Specifications are based on products by the following:
1. Tremco CPG, Inc.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated or submit request for substitution per Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures.”
2.4 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. KEE Roof Membrane: Thermoplastic Ketone Ethylene Ester (KEE) coated polyester fabric-reinforced fleece-backed sheet, ASTM D6754.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; TremPly KEE FB Single Ply Roof Membrane.
2. Breaking Strength, minimum, ASTM D751: Machine direction, 500 lbf; Cross machine direction 400 lbf.
3. Tear Strength, minimum, ASTM D751: Machine direction, 125 lbf; Cross machine direction (145 lbf).
4. Elongation at Break, ASTM D751: 20 percent.
5. Dynamic Impact/Puncture Resistance, ASTM D5635: Pass.
6. Minimum Membrane Thickness, nominal, less backing, ASTM D751: 60 mils.
7. Thickness over fiber, optical method: 0.016 inches.
8. Accelerated Weathering, ASTM G155 and ASTM G154: Not greater than 5,000 hr., no cracking or crazing.
283
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 6 of 13
9. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D3389: Not greater than 2,000 cycles, H-18 wheel, 1,000 g load.
10. Color: White.
11. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI), ASTM E1980: 110 (White, initial), 86 (White, 3-yr aged).
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard, smooth-backed, sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness and color as KEE roof membrane.
2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Membrane Bonding Adhesive: Low-VOC waterborne bonding adhesive for bonding KEE fleece-backed single ply membranes and flashings to substrates.
1. Basis of Design: Tremco, TremPly KEE FB WBII Bonding Adhesive.
2. VOC, maximum, ASTM D3960: 153 g/L.
C. Flashing Membrane Adhesive: VOC-compliant fast drying solvent based adhesive for bonding KEE smooth-backed single ply membranes and flashings to substrates.
1. Basis of design product: Tremco, TremPly KEE LV Bonding Adhesive.
2. VOC, maximum, ASTM D 3960: 200 g/L.
D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
F. Joint Sealant: Elastomeric joint sealant compatible with roofing materials, with movement capability appropriate for application.
1. Joint Sealant, Polyurethane: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 single- component moisture curing sealant, formulated for compatibility and use in dynamic and static joints; paintable.
a. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; TremSEAL Pro.
b. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D3960: 40 g/L. c. Hardness, Shore A, ASTM C661: 40.
d. Adhesion to Concrete, ASTM C794: 35 pli.
e. Tensile Strength, ASTM D412: 350 psi.
f. Color: White.
284
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 7 of 13
2. Synthetic rubberized, non-curing, permanently flexible mastic for use on approved substrates and single ply roofing.
a. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; Water Block Sealant.
G. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
H. Cover Board: Gypsum panel, glass-mat-faced, ASTM C1177/C1177M.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco/GP Gypsum DensDeck.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
I. Roof Insulation Adhesive: Urethane adhesive, bead-applied, low-rise two-component solvent-free low odor, formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; Low Rise Foam Insulation Adhesive.
2. Flame Spread Index, ASTM E84: 10.
3. Smoke Developed Index, ASTM E84: 30.
4. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D3960: 0 g/L.
5. Tensile Strength, minimum, ASTM D412: 250 psi (1720 kPa).
6. Peel Adhesion, minimum, ASTM D903: 17 lbf/in (2.50 kN/m).
7. Flexibility, 70 deg. F (39 deg. C), ASTM D816: Pass.
J. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
K. Wood Cant Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 06 rough carpentry Section.
L. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
M. Substrate Joint Tape: 6- or 8-inch wide, coated, glass fiber.
N. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.6 FLUID-APPLIED GUTTER RESTORATION COATING
A. Polyurethane Elastomeric Fluid-Applied System: Two-coat fluid-applied roofing membrane formulated for application over prepared substrate.
1. Base Coating: Two component moisture-curing polyurethane-modified methyl methacrylate reinforced roof coating system base coat, for use with a compatible top coat.
a. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; AlphaGuard PUMA Base Coat. b. Combustion Characteristics, UL790: Maintains combustion characteristics of existing roof system.
c. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D3960: 0 g/L. d. Tensile Strength, ASTM D5147: 175 lbf/in.
e. Elongation, Reinforced, ASTM D5147: 40 percent.
f. Crack Bridging, ASTM D5147: Pass - 2 mm.
285
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 8 of 13
g. Hardness, Shore A, minimum, ASTM D2240: 93.
h. Minimum Thickness, Reinforced Base Coat: 80 mils wet total: Apply 40 mils wet, plus 40 mils wet over reinforcing fabric.
2. Top Coat: Two-component, 0 VOC, UV resistant, polyurethane-modified methyl methacrylate roof coating system top coat for application over compatible base coat.
a. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; AlphaGuard PUMA Top Coat. b. Combustion Characteristics, UL 790
c. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D3960: 0 g/L. d. Tensile Strength, ASTM D5147: 175 lbf/in.
e. Elongation, Reinforced, ASTM D5147: 40 percent.
f. Crack Bridging, ASTM D5147: Pass, 2 mm.
g. Hardness, Shore A, minimum, ASTM D2240: 93.
h. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI), minimum, ASTM E1980: 95. i. Minimum Thickness: 36 mils wet over cured base coat.
B. Primers:
1. Primer for Non-Porous Surfaces: Single-part, water based primer to promote adhesion of urethanes to metals, PVC and other non-porous surfaces. a. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; AlphaGuard M-Prime. b. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D3960: 22 g/L. c. Nonvolatile Content, minimum, ASTM D2369: 5 percent. d. Density at 77 deg F (25 deg C): 8.3 lb/gal.
2. Primer for Non-Porous Surfaces Containing Rust: Single-part, water-based primer to promote adhesion of coating materials to metal containing rust. a. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; SolarGard Rust Primer
3. Primer for Intercoat and Substrate Adhesion: Single-part, quick-drying primer to promote adhesion of urethane products to previous urethane coats and to other approved surfaces.
a. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; Geogard Primer.
b. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D3960: 100 g/L. c. Coverage Rate, 400 sq. ft/ gal. (10 m2/ L): 4 mils wet.
C. Reinforcing Fabric: Polyester reinforcing fabric, 100 percent stitch-bonded mildew- resistant polyester fabric intended for reinforcement of compatible fluid-applied membranes.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; Permafab.
2. Tensile Strength, Minimum, ASTM D1682: 50 lbf averageg.
3. Elongation, Minimum, ASTM D1682: 60 percent.
4. Tear Strength, Minimum, ASTM D1117: 16 lbf average.
5. Weight: 3 oz./sq. yd.
286
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 9 of 13
2.7 EXPOSED METALS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish as indicated.
2. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; Tremlock Flat Sheet.
2.8 MANUFACTURED COPINGS
A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps.
1. Coping Profile: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; TremLock Infinity Coping.
3. Coping-Cap Material: Zinc-coated steel, nominal 22 ga.; 0.034-inch thickness. a. Finish: High-performance organic (PVDF) coating.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded.
5. Special Fabrications: As indicated on drawings. Radiused sections.
6. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on, fabricated from coping-cap material.
7. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches wide, with integral cleats.
2.9 WALKWAY MATERIALS
A. Walkway/Protection Mat Material: Reinforced KEE membrane roll with serrated slip- resistant surface, fabricated for heat welding to compatible KEE membrane surface.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco; TremPly KEE Walkway Roll.
2. Roll Size: 30 inches by 50 ft.
3. Thickness: 0.047 inch.
4. Breaking strength: 56 lbs.
5. Color: Grey.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 287
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 10 of 13
2. Wood Roof Deck: Verify that deck is sound and dry and securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane relative to adjoining deck.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Tear off existing roof system down to the wood deck.
B. Clean off the wood deck to provide a suitable substrate at the direction of the Roof System Manufacturer.
C. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
D. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
E. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved details.
B. NRCA Installation Details: Install roofing system in accordance with applicable NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA recommendations; modify as required to comply with manufacturer's approved details and perimeter fastening requirements of FM Global references if applicable.
3.4 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Cover Boards: Install cover boards over wood roof deck with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together.
1. Secure cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
2. Adhere cover boards by setting in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining cover board in place. Do not mechanically attach coverboards.
288
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 11 of 13
3.5 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Water-Based Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate at rate required by manufacturer.
Install membrane immediately into adhesive, avoiding any air entrapment; do not allow adhesive to dry. Roll membrane into wet adhesive. Do not apply adhesive to splice area of membrane.
E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
G. Welded Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.
2. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.
3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Seal top termination of base flashing with a metal termination bar and a continuous bead of joint sealant.
289
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 12 of 13
3.7 PARAPET WALL INSTALLATION
A. Fully adhere flashing sheets to the parapet wall and wrap the top of the wall with the flashing sheet.
B. For parapet walls greater than 36 inches in height, mechanically fasten intermediate termination bar every 36 inches in height. Lap any subsequent flashing sheets over the termination bar, and heat weld the lap to cover the termination bar.
3.8 GUTTER RESTORATION COATING
A. Clean gutters and apply restoration coating in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Preparation:
1. Clean gutters of dirt and debris by pressure washing. Use light detergents if necessary.
2. Wipe clean all interior faces of the metal gutter of any remaining debris and water.
C. Coating Application:
1. Once dry, apply primer as directed by the Roof System Manufacturer’s representative.
2. Properly mix base coat per the Roof System Manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Apply base coat to all internal gutter faces at the specified coverage rate.
4. Embed polyester fabric to cover all applied base coat and apply an additional coat of base coat at the specified coverage rate.
5. Once cured, apply top coat at the specified coverage rate in one coat.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF COPINGS
A. Install clips, cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.
B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.
1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements.
3.10 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 290
22-12479 – Ph 2 SINGLE PLY ROOFING 075416 - 13 of 13
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Roofing Inspector: Contractor shall engage a qualified roofing inspector employed by Roof System Manufacturer to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
1. Engage a qualified roofing inspector for a minimum of 3 full-time days on site to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare start up, interim, and final reports. Roofing Inspector's quality assurance inspections shall comply with applicable criteria established in NRCA's "Quality Control and Quality-assurance Guidelines for the Application of Membrane Roofing Systems." B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.12 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
291
22-12479 – Ph 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 of 9 SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Formed sheet metal fabrications:
1. Flashing and trim.
2. Copings.
3. Miscellaneous sheet metal fabrications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Division 07 Sections as applicable to metal roof panels for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal roof systems.
3. Division 07 Sections as applicable to roofing for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing systems.
4. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim sealants.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
292
22-12479 – Ph 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 of 9 B. Shop Drawings: For fabricated sheet metal items. Show fabrication and installation layouts including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work. Include the following:
1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction.
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable.
7. Details of special conditions.
8. Details of connections to adjoining work.
9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Entity that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in 293
22-12479 – Ph 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3 of 9 construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA’s “The Roofing and Waterproofing Manual” and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements as applicable for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Thermal Movements: Sheet metal flashing and trim shall allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat.
2. Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621.
Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. b. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.
B. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 294
22-12479 – Ph 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4 of 9 C. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F.
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F.
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.
e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. Self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
2. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.
3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet:
Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Solder for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
295
22-12479 – Ph 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5 of 9 G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim as indicated on Drawings and to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored and of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams and as follows:
1. Seams for Pre-Finished Metal: Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
2. Seams for Unfinished Sheet Steel: Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
3. Seams for Unfinished Aluminum: Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer.
Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
296
22-12479 – Ph 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6 of 9 G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Copings: Fabricate to cross section indicated in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10 foot long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. Fabricate from 0.028 inch (24 gage) thick galvanized steel.
1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch wide, concealed backup plate and 6-inch wide, exposed cover plates
B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from 0.028 inch (24 gage) thick galvanized steel.
C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from 0.028 inch (24 gage) thick galvanized steel.
D. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel, 0.015 inch thick.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Fabrications: Fabricate from 0.028 inch (24 gage) thick galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
297
22-12479 – Ph 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7 of 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches.
B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment wrinkle free.
Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
298
22-12479 – Ph 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 8 of 9
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corners or intersections. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fastener Sizes:
1. Wood Framing, Blocking, and Sheathing: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate [wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," and NRCA’s Roofing and Waterproofing Manuals as applicable to project conditions Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
299
22-12479 – Ph 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 9 of 9 B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch centers.
C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
300
301
22-12479 – Ph 2 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 of 9
SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants including mildew resistant silicone joint sealants
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Latex joint sealants.
4. Acoustical joint sealants.
5. Joint sealant Backings
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product, include documentation for VOC content of sealants and sealant primers.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity employing installers trained and experienced in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
302
22-12479 – Ph 2 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 of 9
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties shall warrant that all exposed sealants will be guaranteed against any crazing developing on the surfaces of the material, any staining of adjacent surfaces by sealant or by primer (yellowing, etc.), chalking, or color changes on surface of cured sealant.
D. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content: Sealants and primers applied at the Project site shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction; VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); and VOC limits of the California Green Building Standards Code (CGBSC), Section 5.504.4.1 and Table 504.4.2 as follows:
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
303
22-12479 – Ph 2 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 of 9
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are indicated to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are used in areas of food preparation, use products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600 and are USDA approved.
F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
G. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from a single source from a single manufacturer.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, non-traffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
2. Joint Sealant Application: Exterior joints where one or both joint faces are masonry, stone, concrete or other porous materials and are not to be painted.
B. Silicone, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 999-A.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Contractors SCS1000. c. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze.
2. Joint Sealant Application: Exterior joints where both joint faces are metal, glass, plastic, or other non-porous material and are not to be painted. 304
22-12479 – Ph 2 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 of 9
C. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single- component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT; formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
2. Joint Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and floor or wall surfaces of non-porous materials and are not to be painted.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.
b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.
2. Joint Sealant Application: Exterior joints of hollow metal frames, exterior joints in concrete and masonry walls, and interior and exterior joints requiring painting.
B. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1.
b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201.
c. Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1CSL.
2. Joint Sealant Application: Interior concrete slab floor joints and exterior paving joints.
305
22-12479 – Ph 2 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 of 9
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
2. Joint Sealant Application: Interior non-moving joints between gypsum board and adjacent materials, trim, or similar surfaces.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. GE Construction Sealants; RCS20 Acoustical.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919.
c. Tremco, Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Joint Sealant Application: Interior joints of acoustically rated construction and where indicated on Drawings.
2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) or Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 306
22-12479 – Ph 2 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 of 9
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 307
22-12479 – Ph 2 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7 of 9
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by manufacturer to remove excess alkalinity, unless sealant manufacturer's printed instructions indicate that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with diluted ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation.
C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 308
22-12479 – Ph 2 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8 of 9
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at center (thin) section of bead:
1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than 3/8 inch deep.
2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but neither more than 1/2 inch deep nor less than 1/4 inch deep.
3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in range of 75 to 125 percent of joint width.
G. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces.
H. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.
C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.
309
22-12479 – Ph 2 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 9 of 9
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
310
311
22-12479 – Ph 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 of 9 SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Hollow-metal frames.
2. Hollow-metal doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
2. Division 09 Sections “Painting” for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. 312
22-12479 – Ph 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 of 9
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating steel frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for standard steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. New Doors in Existing Frames: Coordinate sizes of new doors to be installed in existing frames, field verify sizes of existing openings and coordinate door size PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
5. Metal Products Incorporated (MPI).
6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
7. Windsor Republic Doors.
313
22-12479 – Ph 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 of 9 B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from a single source from a single manufacturer.
2.2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
1. Type/Design: Flush panel unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled, 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
4. Openings: Factory cut openings in doors.
5. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
6. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
7. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
8. Exposed Finish: Factory prime finish for field painting.
B. Exterior Doors: Doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level.
1. Extra Heavy Duty Doors, Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A.
2. Edge Condition: Model 1, full flush.
3. Face Sheet Material: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet, 0.053-inch minimum thickness (16 gage).
4. Core Construction: One of the following:
a. Manufacturer's standard polyurethane, or polyisocyanurate core. b. Manufacturer’s standard as required to comply with fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.
5. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
6. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.
C. Interior Doors: Doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level.
1. Heavy Duty Doors, Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B.
2. Edge Condition: Model 1, full flush.
3. Face Sheet Material: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, 0.042-inch minimum thickness (18 gage).
314
22-12479 – Ph 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 of 9
4. Core Construction: One of the following:
a. Manufacturer's standard polyurethane, or polyisocyanurate core. b. Kraft paper honeycomb core; one inch cell, phenolic resin impregnated core, laminated to face sheets, full area.
c. Manufacturer’s standard as required to comply with fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.
2.3 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped full profile welded corners unless otherwise indicated.
2. Frames shall be sized to provide full throat width equal to depth of wall including finishes plus 1/2 inch backbend on each side per SDI-100.
B. Exterior Frames: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (16- gage).
C. Interior Frames: Cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053-inch (16 gage).
D. Exposed Finish: Factory prime finish for field painting.
E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate with reinforcement plates from same material as frames with minimum reinforcement according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 and the following:
1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
2. Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
3. Lock Face, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.
4. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.
F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
G. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot- rolled steel sheet.
H. Plaster Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016-inch thick.
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. 315
22-12479 – Ph 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 of 9
2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.
3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.
B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor; form from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
C. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.
2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 zinc-iron-alloy coating designation.
1. Material indicated to be fabricated from metallic coated steel sheet shall be of galvannealed steel sheet.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15- mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 316
22-12479 – Ph 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 of 9
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
2. Sidelight and/or Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding.
3. Fabricate exterior frames with an additional flashing flange at the exterior side of frames as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Provide countersunk, flat or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
5. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.
6. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.
a. For conditions that do not allow for a floor anchor, provide an additional jamb anchor.
7. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows unless additional anchors are required for fire rating:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames 42 inches or more in width and mounted in metal-stud framed partitions.
b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 317
22-12479 – Ph 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 of 9
8. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface- mounted door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.
2. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 318
22-12479 – Ph 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8 of 9
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.